Sunteți pe pagina 1din 191

Melrose

at

Seven Hills Road South


Seven Hills, NSW

Specification Conservation & New work


For alterations & additions.

Prepared for Blacktown City Council For construction certificate prepared by Tropman & Tropman Architects

May 2012 REF:0921 : SPEC - B

Tropman & Tropman Architects


Architecture Conservation Landscape Interiors Urban Design Interpretation 55 Lower Fort Street Sydney NSW 2000 Phone: (02) 9251 3250 Fax: (02) 9251 6109 www.tropmanarchitects.com.au Email: tropman@tropmanarchitects.com.au
TROPMAN AUSTRALIA PTY LTD ABN 71 088 542 885 INCORPORATED IN NEW SOUTH WALES Lester Tropman Architects Registration: 3786 John Tropman Architects Registration: 5152

Melrose Specification

Contents

Issue Register
The following table is a report register tracking the issues of the Specification prepared by Tropman & Tropman Architects. Tropman & Tropman Architects operate under a quality management system, and this register is in compliance with this system. TTA Project Ref No. 0921 SPEC 0921 SPEC 0921 SPEC Issue No. A B C Description DRAFT for tender Specification For tender Specification For tender Specification Issue Date 09.09.11 23.11.11 02.05.12 Prepared By Kate Seaman Kate Seaman Kate Seaman Checked By Tasman Storey Tasman Storey Tasman Storey Issued To Client for tender Client for tender Client for tender Stage 3

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

September 2011

Melrose Specification

Contents

Tendering ............................................................................................................................................ 4 CONSERVATION SPECIFICATION .................................................................................................... 9 Conservation preliminaries .............................................................................................................. 10 Conservation demolisher ................................................................................................................. 12 Conservation bricklayer ................................................................................................................... 14 Conservation carepenter & joiner ................................................................................................... 20 Conservation roof & roof plumber .................................................................................................. 26 Conservation internal linings .......................................................................................................... 33 Conservaiton plasterer ..................................................................................................................... 34 Conservation glazier ........................................................................................................................ 37 Conservaiton painter, paperhanger & floor finisher ...................................................................... 38 NEW WORK / GENERAL SPECIFICATION ...................................................................................... 43 Preliminaries (interiors and alterations) ......................................................................................... 44 General requirements ....................................................................................................................... 48 Metals and prefinishes ..................................................................................................................... 64 Termite management ........................................................................................................................ 67 Demolition (interior and alterations) ............................................................................................... 69 Concrete reinforcement ................................................................................................................... 73 Light timber framing ......................................................................................................................... 75 Roofing combined ......................................................................................................................... 80 Cladding combined........................................................................................................................ 86 Windows and glazed doors .............................................................................................................. 89 Louvre windows................................................................................................................................ 96 Glazing............................................................................................................................................. 100 Insulation and sarking membranes ............................................................................................... 104 Lining ............................................................................................................................................... 110 Joinery ............................................................................................................................................. 114 Waterproofing wet areas ............................................................................................................. 120 Ceramic tiling .................................................................................................................................. 127 Floor sanding and finishing ........................................................................................................... 134 ARMSTRONG resilient finishes ..................................................................................................... 139 Painting ........................................................................................................................................... 145 Mechanical design and install ....................................................................................................... 149 Hydraulic design and install .......................................................................................................... 165 Electrical design and install ........................................................................................................... 178
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 3 September 2011

Melrose Specification

Tendering

TENDERING

1 1.1

CONDITIONS OF TENDERING RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide a complete genuine tender. 1.2 GENERAL

Status General: These conditions of tendering will not form part of the contract. Definition General: In these conditions of tendering, the word principal has the same meaning as owner and proprietor. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

Outline description of the works Conservation, repairs, maintenance, alterations and additions to a heritage property Description of the site Location: Melrose, 71 Seven Hills Road, South Seven Hills, NSW Tender documents The tender documents comprise the following: - Conditions of tendering. - Schedule of rates. - General conditions of contract. - Special conditions of contract. - Appendix or annexure to general conditions of contract, partly pre-completed. - Specifications. - Drawings. - Nominated subcontracts. - Deeds of novation for nominated subcontracts. - Subcontract interfacing information, including services and facilities. Security: Do not disclose to third parties tender documents marked with a classification such as Restricted, Confidential or Secret, except with prior written approval of the principal and subject to conditions imposed. 1.4 FURTHER INFORMATION

Contact person Inquiries: Refer inquiries to the following: - Name: Katrina Parker - Telephone: (02) 9839 6272 - Email: Katrina.parker@blacktown.nsw.gov.au Examination General: A full set of documents is available for examination, which may be arranged through the contact person. Site inspections General: Information on dates and times at which the site will be available for inspection can be obtained from the contact person. . Addenda General: Written addenda issued by the principal are the only recognised explanations of, or amendments to, the tender documents.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 4 September 2011

Melrose Specification

Tendering

1.5

PREPARATION OF TENDERS

Tender form Form: Submit the tender on the Tender form provided. Addenda: Confirm on the Tender form that allowance has been made of each addendum and any extensions of the tender period. Name and address of tenderer: State the following: - If an individual, the name in full and address of the individual. - If an unincorporated body, the registered business name and address of the body and the name in full and address of each member of the body. - If a company, the name, ABN and registered office address of the company. Address for service of notices: Include on the Tender form an address for service of notices for the purpose of this tender and any subsequent contract arising out of this tender. Execution: Sign the Tender form or, if a company, comply with the relevant provisions of the Corporations Law and regulations. Scope Scope: Tender for the whole of the work described in the tender documents unless the tender documents provide otherwise. Exclusions: If unable to tender on parts of the works, inform the contact person in writing as soon as possible, defining the relevant parts and giving reasons. Completion General: Complete in full the Tender form and other required documents. Alterations: Do not alter or add to tender documents except as may be required by these conditions of tendering. Selected subcontracts General: Submit with the tender the identity of subcontractors proposed for selected subcontract work. Alternatives General: Alternative proposals may be submitted with the tender for consideration, but: - A conforming tender must be submitted, which complies with the tender documents. - A detailed description of the alternative must be submitted, stating clearly the manner in which it differs from the requirements of the tender documents whilst complying with the principals commercial and technical objectives. Alternative time for practical completion: Consideration will be given to alternative tenders which offer different times for practical completion. The prescribed liquidated damages will apply to those different times. Alternative working hours and working days: If the tender includes an allowance for work at times other than the working hours or working days prescribed in the tender documents, submit the working hours and days proposed. Evidence of contractors registration or licensing General: If it is a statutory requirement of the state or territory in which the works are located that a contractor (as defined by the statutory requirement) be registered or licensed to carry out the work described in the tender documents, submit with the tender evidence of registration or licence. Cost: The cost of this work will not be reimbursed. Prototypes Cost: The cost of this work will not be reimbursed. Program General: Submit a construction program in the form of a preliminary bar chart and network diagram, showing the following: - Sequence of work. - Periods within which various stages or parts of the work are to be executed. - Critical paths of activities related to the work. - Allowance for holidays. - Restraints imposed by the contract documents.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 5 September 2011

Melrose Specification

Tendering

- Significant milestones including separable parts, if any. - Activity inter-relationships, including those activities to be undertaken by subcontractors and suppliers, both on and off site. - External dependencies including provision of access, document approvals and work by others. - The estimated value of work completed for each month. Method statements Provide as required Conflict of interest Report if there are any conflicts of interest Quality system Tenderers submission: Submit a statement of quality control resources. 1.6 SUBMISSION OF TENDERS

Lodgement Procedure: Procedure for lodgement of tender are contained in detail in the Blacktown City Council Request for Tender document. Oral tenders: Oral tenders will not be considered. Franking: Impressions of franking machines are not acceptable evidence of timely posting or dispatch. Supporting information: Enclose in a separate sealed envelope marked with the description of the work and the identity of the tenderer. Late tenders Prepaid post or facsimile: Late tenders submitted by prepaid post or facsimile may be considered, if the principal is satisfied that in the ordinary course of post or transmission they would have been received by the date and time for closing of tenders. Other: Late tenders sent by other forms of delivery or transmission will not be considered. Closing of tenders Refer to the Blacktown City Council Request for Tender document. Place for lodgement Tender box location: This is a hardcopy tender. Hardcopy tenders are to be lodges in the Council Tender box in the foyer at Civic Centre, 62 Flushcombe Rd, Blacktown, NSW 2148.. 1.7 PROCEDURES AFTER TENDER PERIOD

Tender validity period General: Unless withdrawn, tenders must remain valid from the date and time for closing of tenders, for the following period: 120 days Evaluation of tenders General: In evaluating the tenders, the principal may take into consideration the following: - Conformity with tender documents. - Capital cost compared with estimated cost. - Construction period. - Proposed use of local subcontractors and suppliers. - Proposed alternatives. - Alternative working times proposed by the tenderer, and the cost to the principal of providing contract administration for the work under the contract at those times. - Maintenance and running costs. - Design proposals. - Quality of prototypes. - Construction program. - Proposed methods. - Quality assurance. - Conflicts of interest. - Life of proposed equipment. - Standardisation of proposed equipment.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 6 September 2011

Melrose Specification

Tendering

- Tenderers CADD format. - Value for money. - Tenderers resources. - Tenderers current commitments. - Tenderers previous performance. - Industrial relations and safety records. Qualifications: Tenders containing unauthorised alterations, additions or qualifications may be rejected. Unpriced items: Costs relating to items not priced will be assumed to have been included elsewhere in the tender. Correction of errors in tenders Procedure: Advise Blacktown City Council, Katrina Parker in writing immediately in accordance with the Blacktown City Council Request for tender documents Additional information General: If required, submit additional information, by the stipulated date and time, to allow further consideration of the tender before any tender is accepted. Failure to meet this requirement may result in the tender being rejected. Confidentiality General: Treat as confidential any information provided after the tender period. Acceptance of tender Non-acceptance: The principal is not bound to accept the lowest or any tender, or to give reasons. Acceptance: A tender is not accepted until notice in writing of acceptance is: - Handed to the tenderer. - Sent by prepaid post to, or left at, the address for service of notices stated in the Tender form. - Transmitted by facsimile to the tenderers facsimile number. Partial acceptance: Tenders may be accepted for the whole of the work. Formal instrument of agreement: Required. Arrangements for return of tender documents Return of documents: Documents become the property of Blacktown City Council and will not be returned in accordance with the Blacktown City Council Request for Tender Documents. Period between acceptance of tender and possession of site Anticipated maximum period: Will be discussed and agreed with successful tenderer.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

September 2011

Melrose Specification

Tendering

TENDER FORM

Name of principal: Name of project: Tender lump sum I/We tender to perform the work for the above project as described in, and in accordance with, the tender documents referenced in the and in accordance with the attached Schedule of rates/Contract sum analysis/priced Bills of quantities and for the lump sum (which includes specified provisional sums) of .. including GST (sum in words and figures) The contract duration will be weeks from the date of site possession. This tender remains open for consideration for weeks from the date and time of closing of the tender period. I/We acknowledge the receipt of addenda numbered during the tender period. Tender schedule of rates I/We tender to perform the work for the above project as described in, and in accordance with, the tender documents referenced in the Conditions of tendering and in accordance with the attached Schedule of rates/Contract sum analysis/priced Bills of quantities and for the lump sum (which includes specified provisional sums) of .. including GST (sum in words and figures) The contract duration will be weeks from the date of site possession. This tender remains open for consideration for weeks from the date and time of closing of the tender period. I/We acknowledge the receipt of addenda numbered during the tender period. Name of tenderer ABN/ACN Telephone Facsimile Tenderers address or registered business office address Address for service of notices Tenderers bank and branch address Execution if tenderer is an individual or unincorporated body Tenderers signature Witness signature Execution if tenderer is a company The common seal of the tenderer was affixed in accordance with the Articles of Association Directors signature Secretarys signature OR Authorised officers signature Witness signature Date of tender

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

September 2011

Conservation Specification

CONSERVATION SPECIFICATION

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Preliminaries

CONSERVATION PRELIMINARIES

1.1 GENERAL This conservation specification covers ONLY the conservation on existing elements in the building and it to be read in conjunction with the specification. This conservation specification takes precedence over the specification. The conservations works comprise the repair and reconstruction to the property Melrose of fabric such as brick, render and joinery internally and to the verandah. The repair and reconstruction of the roof and rainwater goods so as to ensure the building is waterproof and conforms to fire regulations.

1.2 SALVAGED MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified, and subject to the General Conditions of Contract, materials, plant, equipment or other things salvaged from the works shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed by him from the site, after gaining approval from the Architect. LIST OF ITEMS TO BE SALVAGED FOR OWNER: 1. 2. 3. 4. All removed joinery All removed window and door hardware All removed stone and brickwork Other items as directed by the Architect

1.3 ARCHAEOLOGICAL ARTEFACTS AND DEPOSITS Archaeological artefacts (relics) and deposits are protected by the New South Wales Heritage Act, 1977, Division 9. a) Prior to commencing work to foundations, sub-floor areas and general site excavation the Contractor shall give the Architect or the Owners archaeologist 5 working days notice prior to the commencement of work. All excavation and demolition work shall be carried out in the presence of the Architect or the Owners archaeologist or other representative and such work shall be stopped upon the instruction of such representative for periods of up to four days. Such stop work periods shall be deemed to be valid causes for extension of time to the Contract but not valid causes for extensions of time to the Contract sum. c) The definition of an Artefact or Relic is at the Architects discretion. An artefact or relic means any deposit, object or material evidence relating to the non-Aboriginal settlement of New South Wales which is 50 years old or more (Section 139). If in doubt of the significance of an item, ask the Architect. All artefacts or relics as defined above shall be deemed to be absolute property of the Owner. The Contractor shall at all times permit and allow the Architect or any person authorised by the Architect to watch or examine any excavation or demolition.
10 September 2011

b)

d) e)

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

Conservation Specification

Conservation Preliminaries

1.4 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES Some hazardous materials investigation has been completed please refer to the Melrose Remedial action plan included in the tender documents Contractor to allow for inspection and treatment of asbestos, arsenic and any other dangerous or hazardous substance. Upon discovery of asbestos, arsenic, contaminants and any other hazardous substances, the Contractor must immediately inform the Architect. Any inspections and/or treatment required, and as directed by the Architect, must be undertaken by the Contractor.

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j)

Clear and remove all surplus materials, rubbish, dirt, etc. Make good all damage, stains and blemishes and replace materials where necessary. Clean all surfaces and clean and polish glass, tile and natural or chromed metal finishes. Bring all surfaces to the specified finishes. Check, test and ensure that all services and equipment are functioning efficiently and satisfactorily. Label all keys and hand over to the Architect. Submit to the Architect all guarantees, warranties, etc., specified herein including manufacturers operation instructions including all nominated sub-contractors plant and equipment. Return all Contract Documents to the Architect. Submit to the Architect the Metropolitan Water Sewerage and Drainage Boards Certificate in respect of satisfactory completion of the drainage and plumbing work. Submit to the Architect five copies each of the services as installed layouts, i.e. water and sewer and the electrical diagrams.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

11

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Demolisher

CONSERVATION DEMOLISHER

2.1 GENERALLY The contractor is to make the workmen and sub-contractors aware that these buildings are old and fragile. Care is to be exercised throughout the contract to subject the fabric to as little shock as is practical. All demolitions are to be carried out within this context. All damage sustained to the building during the demolition work is to be rectified by the contractor to the Architect's approval at no variation to contract sum. All demolition and preparation of existing work for alterations is to be carried out in a careful and systematic manner. Properly shore up and support all work where necessary in such a manner and for a period as will be directed. The builder shall be responsible at all times during the period of the contract for the safety and stability of the works. Cut away, break down, take up and remove such portions of existing work as may be required to make way for the new work as indicated on the drawings and/or scheduled herein. Demolish or preserve surfaces, hardware and services as scheduled. Set aside items scheduled to be salvaged or reused in new locations or to remain the property of the Department.

2.2 WATER ENTRY Ensure that the existing structure is at all times maintained in a waterproof condition during the carrying out of the works. The contractor shall accept responsibility for any damage resulting from failure to prevent water entry, and reinstate damaged building fabric and contents at no variation to contract sum.

2.3 PROTECT CHIMNEY POTS & CAGES When removing roof fabric care shall be taken not to dislodge chimney pots & cages. The contractor shall replace any section of chimney dislodged due to demolitions at no variation to the contract sum.

2.4 PROTECT STAIRCASES & THRESHOLDS & JOINERY Protect existing staircases from damage during the progress of the works. Provide temporary hardboard covering to treads and thresholds and joinery to ensure no damage. The Contractor is to make good any damage to the direction of the Architect at no variation to the contract sum.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

12

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Demolisher

2.5 DEMOLISHED MATERIALS Materials obtained from the demolitions, if suitable and approved by the Architect, may be reused in such positions directed by him. The remaining demolished materials are to be carted from the site and deposited in accordance with the rules of the Local Authority after first being inspected by the Architect or his representative.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

13

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Bricklayer

CONSERVATION BRICKLAYER

3.1

GENERALLY

The brickwork of the works shall be carried out by experienced tradesmen. UOS AS1640 - Rules for brickwork in buildings (metric units) shall apply in respect to all materials, components and construction.

3.2 NEW BRICKS All new bricks shall be sound machine-made bricks, well burnt, hard, square and with good arrises. All new brickwork to be in commons. New bricks are to be used for all concealed work unless size of existing bricks entails use of salvaged bricks. 3.3 SALVAGED BRICKS Carefully salvage and clean off all old bricks from demolition for reuse in repair work to existing facebrick and new face brickwork. 3.4 SUPPLY OF OLD BRICKS The builder shall keep a record of old bricks obtained from demolition and calculate additional old bricks that are required for face work. UOS do not allow for supply of old bricks. Should additional old bricks be required this will be treated as a contract variation. 3.5 MATERIALS & MORTAR Generally - ABS Stonemason. Cement Lime Putty, Sand - ABS Stonemason. Compo mortar - use only for new subfloor piers, subfloor walls, new building additions and where specifically scheduled: 1 part cement 1 part lime putty 6 parts sand Lime mortar - use for remainder of work 3 parts sand 1 part lime putty The mixture should be allowed to stand min. 14 days before using. Where specifically instructed by the Architect a light gauging (1:12) of cement may be added to mortar used in joints badly exposed to the weather, for example copings.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

14

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Bricklayer

3.6 STANDARD OF FINISH Work to Face Walls Rebuild and make good to match standard of best existing adjacent work.

3.7 JOINTS Work to Existing Walls Where rebuilding, repointing or making good to existing face work, match sound original joints as determined by examination of adjacent areas and approved by the Architect. A sample of the proposed jointing profile for each area of brickwork is to be approved by the Architect before the work is carried out.

3.8 BRICK REPAIRS Replace Where scheduled 'replace', remove entire area or element nominated and build new work matching exactly adjacent original work. Make good or repair Where schedule 'make good' or 'repair' existing brickwork remove all decayed or faulty bricks from area or element nominated and build in salvaged bricks of same size and jointing pattern as original. Rake out or remove remainder of loose or faulty mortar from joints and repoint ABS POINTING.

3.9 POINTING Generally On no account is any joint to be widened to admit pointing. The repointing is intended purely as filling to prevent the permeation of water between units into the walling behind. Stronger mortar may be used only as directed in very exposed positions. Do not allow mortar to spread over face of bricks. Following pointing joints are to be kept damp for min. 14 days to prevent premature drying out and consequent cracking and loosening of mortar. Point up Where schedule 'point up', thoroughly wet open joints and flush up with mortar. Finish joint ABS JOINTS. Repoint Where schedule 'repoint', cement on other jointing shall be removed/raked out to a min. depth of 20mm, the joint thoroughly wetted and flushed up and finished as above.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

15

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Bricklayer

3.10 Solid DPC:

DAMP PROOF COURSE (DPC)

Purpose made plastic sheet dampcourse of embossed polythene, 250 microns thickness carrying approval number of Local Government Department. Unless otherwise specified, each damp proof course is to be installed the full width of walls or wall skins in which they occur, and lapped full width of walls at angles and intersections and 150mm at joinings. UOS locate in the first bed joint above finished floor level. Extend under chimney breasts inc. brick heart plinths (if any) in fireplaces. Chemical Damproof Course (DPC): Proprietary system injected DPC using polyoxo aluminium stearate chemical. Installation to completely block the passage of water from the subfloor walls of the areas treated to the walls above floor level. Provide written guarantee of 20 years against the re-occurrence of wall dampness after the initial drying out. Carefully remove and refix existing skirtings and other finishes fixed to walls such as tiles, in order to make installation. All such finishes damaged during removal are to be replaced to match existing detail exactly. UOS do not include for plaster replacement. Following refixing of skirtings etc. touch up paintwork ABS PAINTER.

3.11

NEW DOORWAYS IN EXISTING WALLS Support head as required and remove sufficient brickwork to build new reveals and

Do not cut bricks. head.

Support masonry over new openings in existing walls on 50 x 10mm galv. steel arch bars cut 230mm longer than width of opening and cambered 12mm. Well seasoned hardwood lintels will be allowed to match existing (use old floor joists etc.)

3.12

NEW BRICK PIERS FOR FLOORS

All new piers are to be free standing of 230 x 230mm at 1830mm centres built off 360 x 360mm x 3 course deep brick footings. Provide 0.7mm galv. ant caps.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

16

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Bricklayer

3.13

NEW SUBFLOOR VENTS

Provide neat penetration through external walls and fit cast vent grille. Where external ground level is near floor level vent penetrations are to be cranked down in the thickness of the wall.

3.14

VENT GRILLES

Where vent grilles are specified or scheduled, install cast iron grilles of a pattern similar to the existing pattern and approved by the Architect.

3.15

EXTRACTOR FAN VENTS

Provide horizontal penetration through wall thickness, sized to interior to suit extractor fan ABS ELECTRICIAN. Exterior opening to be 230 wide x 300 high and fitted with No. 2 230 x 150 vent grilles ABS VENT GRILLES. Parge walls of penetration so that water passing through grille drains to exterior.

3.16

HOOP IRON STRAPS

Provide 25 x 1.6mm gal. hoop iron straps to secure new plates and other new structural framework. Build in strap eight (8) courses below plate or fix as otherwise directed and leave sufficient length of turnover and nail to top of plate. Space straps at not more than 900mm centres.

3.17

VENT HOLES TO INTERNAL SUBFLOOR WALLS

Break in 350 wide x 450 high ventilation holes in subfloor walls and support head with gal. m.s. lintels.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

17

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Bricklayer

3.18

GROUTING OF WALLS

Extent of Work Grout all detectable voids in area of walls scheduled for grouting. Grouting Mix Grouting mix shall be prepared on site with cement/lime/fine aggregate in the required proportions thoroughly mixed first dry and then with water until the required consistency is obtained. Water for grouting mix shall be roof rainwater. Grout mix to be 1 part cement, 2 parts lime, and 9 parts sand with water additive sufficient to make a slow running mix. Mix consistency shall be gauged on site to the satisfaction of the Architect. Mortar not used within two hours shall be discarded. Retempering of dried ore partly set mortar shall not be permitted. Grouting. Wash out dust and loose debris from the internal spaces of the wall with low pressure garden hose open ended. The pattern of water escaping will assist in locating wall voids. Repoint brickwork to one metre height of first lift with mortar and workmanship to specification. Low pressure grout wall up to one metre height from grout bucket and 38mm dia. rubber delivery hose fitted with stop cock. Repeat process in successive lifts of one metre height. Grouting shall be done only whilst the core of the wall is wet. Grout shall be applied at the top of each lift with the grout bucket progressively raised as necessary to keep a constant 1 metre head on the grout in the wall. Grouting shall be completed for the full length of each lift before proceeding on the next lift.

3.19

MAKING GOOD WHERE FITTINGS REMOVED

Fill hole in wall by replacing whole bricks ABS BRICK REPAIRS to produce the original appearance of the wall.

3.20

BRICK & OTHER UNIT PAVINGS

Supply and lay new unit pavings on 50mm thick sand bed. Earth base shall be thoroughly compacted and graded prior to sand bed being laid. UOS lay bricks in stretcher bond on flat with the frogs faced down and with tight dry joint.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

18

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Bricklayer

3.21

COMPLETION

On completion clean walls of all mortar droppings, smears, efflorescence etc. and brush down. Cleaning work shall be carried out by trained and experienced tradesmen. Cleaning procedure shall be under strict surveillance to ensure no damage is caused to the stone faces by bleaching or over cleaning. No cleaning shall commence prior to the Architect approving proposed cleaning method. Before application of approved cleaning agent, wall shall be well dampened and the surrounding area protected. Wash the whole wall with clean water on completion of cleaning procedure. All brushing shall be carried out using an approved nylon bristle brush. shall be avoided. Metal brushes, scrapers or tools

Prior to removal of any scaffolding obtain Architect's detailed approval of repairs.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

19

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Carpenter & Joiner

CONSERVATION CAREPENTER & JOINER

4.1 GENERALLY The joinery of the works shall be carried out by a joiner approved by the Architect. Approval of the use of a particular tradesman shall not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities regarding the performance of the works. Failure to approve a particular tradesman shall not constitute grounds for an adjustment to the contract sum. Approval of a tradesman will be based on his experience in traditional joinery work.

4.2 MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP Materials and Shrinkage. All timbers are to be the best quality of their respective kind, sound and well-seasoned, free from sap, shakes, large or loose knots and other defects. Any joiner's work which may be split, fracture, shrink, part in the joints, or show flaws or other defects or unsoundness due to want of seasoning or bad workmanship is to be removed and replaced with new materials, together with all other work thereby affected. Timber Sizes. Scantlings to be sawn square to the size specified, allowance will only be made for saw cuts and dressing. Except where 'finished size' is specified, joinery will be accepted with a fair Trade Allowance for Working. Levelling. All levelling or joists, plates, beams, etc., on brickwork shall be done with compressed cement sheet, cement mortar, or other such enduring material. The use of wooden packing or wedges will not be allowed. Priming. Prime all external timbers before fixing. Prime on all faces before leaving the joinery shop. Reprime built in surfaces of door and window frames before installing. Surfaces scheduled to be clear finished are to be sprayed with a water repellant agent prior to transportation to AS1606 - Code of practice for water-repellant treatment of timber, joinery and other timber products. Workmanship. The whole of the carpenter's and joiner's work throughout is to be framed, trimmed and finished in the best and most workmanlike manner; all necessary templates, linings, blocks, stops, ironwork, ironmongery, rebating, housing, beading, mitreing, throating, etc., incidental to Carpenter's and Joiner's work is to be done although not specially mentioned herein. All parts usually framed or scheduled as shown to be framed are to be mortise and tenoned; dowel joints will not be permitted unless specifically scheduled.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

20

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Carpenter & Joiner

SECTION 9.2. : MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP. CONTINUED. Framing up to be performed as soon as possible and framing stacked horizontally to season with fillers between until required to be fixed in position, when they are to be wedged, glued up and finally cleaned off. Fixing of Woodwork. All timber work is to be fixed to masonry surface employing traditional timber grounds, wedges, plugs, etc. and all hardware fixed to masonry or plastered surfaces is to be fixed employing a timber mounting block, plate, batten, cleat, etc. Excepting where patent plastic plugs are specifically approved, all plugging and wedging is to be done with dry pine. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, all fixing of woodwork shall be by nails driven by hand.

4.3 SCHEDULE OF TIMBER SPECIES Excepting as elsewhere specified for a particular item of work the following timber are to be used: Other species may be used with Architect's approval. Roof, ground floor framing, Seasoned mixed Australian Hardwood, bottom wall plates: stress grade F17 Wall & ceiling framing: Seasoned select merchantable oregon, stress grade F7. Verandah posts, beams, bearers,Seasoned select grade south-eastern joists, coach house posts & beams: Australian hardwood. Verandah & coachouse roof framing:Seasoned select merchantable oregon,stress grade F7. All joinery:Clear Australian, Thai or Phillipine cedar(Cedrela toona) Solid door & window frames:Seasoned select grade south-eastern Australian hardwood or seasoned select grade Tasmanian Oak. Window Sills:Seasoned tallow wood. External timber fascias barge boards: Seasoned clear western red cedar or linings & other trims:oregon. Weatherboards: Seasoned clear western red cedar or Baltic pine. Internal skirtings, architraves, trims etc.: Clear Australian, Thai or Phillippine Cedar (Cedrela toona). Roofing battens: ABS ROOFER & ROOF PLUMBER.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

21

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Carpenter & Joiner

4.4 SEASONING All joinery timbers to be seasoned so that moisture content is between 10% and 15%. The contractor shall submit satisfactory proof of moisture content if called upon to do so by the Architect.

4.5 TERMITE INSPECTION Inspections are to include the existing subfloor and roof spaces. Thoroughly inspect for termite and other insect infestations. This work is to be carried out by an experienced pest control company approved by the Architect. Provide a written report detailing the locations and types of infestations (if any) to subfloor and roof spaces to be gained through existing manholes and access panels only. Termite barrier treatment shall be in accordance with AS2178 - Code of practice for the treatment of subterranean termite infestation in existing buildings.

4.6 FRAMING GENERALLY Except where otherwise specified, cut, fix and erect all timber framing in accordance with AS1684 Code of practice in construction in timber framing. Minimum nailing requirements shall be as set out therein Section 6 and Appendix D.

4.7 STRIP FLOORING Patch: Where scheduled 'patch', remove boards as scheduled and replace in boards to match sizes and profiles of existing boards. Salvaged boarding is to be reused where sound in lengths greater than 1350mm. Where a whole floor is replaced a small selection of original nails are to be reused. New strip flooring: UOS supply flooring TME. Cramp up and double nail at each joist. Provide 50mm wide margin around fireplace hearths. Flooring is to be cut in and used as working platform for min. 4 months before final fixing. Refix: Where scheduled 'refix' check over flooring, determine which boards are loose and renail ABS FRAMING GENERALLY.

4.8 SANDING INTERIOR TIMBER FLOORS Stop up and basic sand in accordance with AS CA39-1963 - Code of recommended practice for the sanding of interior wooden floors. Sand ABS only where specifically scheduled. Existing Floors: New Floors: All new flooring is to be sanded as per specification.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

22

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Carpenter & Joiner

4.9 TIMBER REPAIRS Patch Where an element is scheduled 'patch', check out defective areas to square section and glue, pin and clamp new patch into cavity. The new section is to fit tightly showing minimum evidence of patching. Timber colour, species and grain to match existing. Plane off and stop up. Where doors have been cored for lock cylinders patching may not be done with dowel. Splice on Where an element is scheduled 'splice on', check out defective areas to form a scarf joint. Scarf on new piece of same cross section to original and securely glue, clamp and otherwise fix to ensure adequate bearing. Recess fixings and conceal. For example bolt heads and nuts to be concealed with timber patches.

Matching Joinery Where scheduled 'to match existing', new elements shall do so exactly in outward appearance. Moulding, profiles member sizes, construction etc. must match that nominated which shall be preserved for comparison. The contractor is not expected to match things such as timber species, construction methods etc. that are not exposed to view at completion.

4.10 Patch linings

EXISTING BOARDED CEILINGS

Where boarded linings are scheduled to be 'patched'; remove boards as scheduled and replace in boards to match sizes and profiles of existing boards. Where flues, chimney breasts or other elements are removed patch across likewise. Salvaged boarding may be reused if of the appropriate profile.

4.11

EXISTING DOOR FRAMES

Replace: Where scheduled 'replace' remove existing and UOS install new frame to match size and profile of original exactly. Provide all grounds, fixings to original detail. Reseat: Where scheduled 'reseat' carefully remove frame and check over and replace defective grounds and other fixings. Reinstall frame plumb and square to original details. Relocate: Where scheduled 'relocate', dismantle frame or jamb lining together with architraves and install at new location nominated to match original details. Provide and fit all new fixings to match original details.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

23

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Carpenter & Joiner

4.12

EXISTING DOORS

Rehang: Where scheduled 'rehang' remove door and patch frame at hinges to provide secure fixing for door. Rehang door reusing existing hinges unless otherwise scheduled. Refit: Where scheduled 'refit', remove door and plane off or add to rails and stiles to provide close fit to existing frame. Glue, pin and clamp additional pieces for larger dimensions than finished size and plane down flush. Rehang ABS. Relocate:Where scheduled 'relocate', salvage door from position nominated. scheduled location. Fit and hang ABS in

Replace mouldings: Where scheduled 'replace mouldings', provide or replace nominated panel mouldings matching exactly existing profile nominated in schedule. Spring into position to provide tight mitres and pin at maximum 200 centres. Prime external mouldings before fixing. Replace: Where scheduled 'replace', remove existing or otherwise nominated door to shop and match details exactly sized to suit existing frame opening. Fit and hang ABS. Reglue door: Where scheduled 'reglue door' remove door to workshop and dismantle carefully salvaging existing timbers. Replace members nominated in schedule to match details of original. Reassemble, glue and clamp.

4.13

NEW DOORS

Flush Door: Flush door with cellular infill to AS 1908, Section 3, thickness 35mm height TME, width as shown or as scheduled, or to suit existing frame opening, prepainted finish. Solid core door: Flush door with blockboard infill to AS 1908, Section 4, thickness 40mm, height TME width as shown or as scheduled or to suit existing frame opening, prepainted finish.

4.14

DOOR HARDWARE

Hardware scheduled to be 'preserved' shall on no account be interferred with except as scheduled. Should doors be taken off, hinges shall be reused together with the original hand made screws. Where hardware is schedule to be removed, patch door frame and doors at fixings.

4.15 Door Furniture:

SCHEDULE OF DOOR HARDWARE

See schedule of window and door hardware.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

24

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Carpenter & Joiner

4.16

EXISTING WINDOW FRAMES

Replace sill: Where scheduled 'replace sill', remove frame from masonry opening, brace frame and detach decayed sill from tenons of pully linings. Check over frame and verify further defective elements (if any) with Architect. Fit new sill to match details of original. Reseat frame ABS in masonry opening plumb and square, and UOS refix existing linings, architraves, mouldings and trims. Replace, reset frame: ABS EXISTING DOOR FRAMES. Where replacing frames salvage and reuse axle pullies and weights.

4.17

EXISTING WINDOW & FANLIGHT SASHES

Reglue sash: Where scheduled 'reglue sash' remove sash to workshop and dismantle carefully salvaging existing glass panes. Replace members nominated in schedule to match details of original. Reassemble, glue and clamp. Prime and reglaze reusing original glass. Replace sash: Where scheduled 'replace sash', make up new sash to match details of existing sash or sash nominated exactly. UOS salvage and reuse sash lifts and fasteners. Rehang sashes: existing weights. Where scheduled 'rehang sash', rehang sashes on first quality sash cord and

Put in working order: Where scheduled 'put in working order', check over, ease and refit sashes replacing defective parting beads, stop beads and pocket covers to match existing. 4.18 WINDOW, FANLIGHT &SHUTTER HARDWARE

Hardware scheduled to be 'preserved' shall on no account be interfered with except as scheduled. Where hardware is schedule to be removed, patch at fixings.

4.19

SCHEDULE OF WINDOW HARDWARE

See schedule of window and door hardware.

4.20

SKIRTINGS & ARCHITRAVES

UOS replacement or patched skirtings and architraves are to match sizes and profiles of existing or that nominated exactly. Sound sections of existing skirtings and architraves are to be salvaged and reused. UOS mitre architraves around openings. Architraves wider than 65mm are to be fixed at outer edges to timber grounds. Mitre skirtings at external angles and scribe at internal angles. Longitudinal joints (if any) are to be made with 45 degree splay. Skirtings higher than 125mm are to be fixed to two rows of grounds.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

25

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Roof & Roof Plumber

CONSERVATION ROOF & ROOF PLUMBER

5.1 GENERALLY Roofing work is to be carried out by a roofer approved by the Architect. Approval of the use of a particular tradesman shall not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities regarding the performance of the works. Failure to approve a particular tradesman shall not constitute grounds for an adjustment to the contract sum. Approval of a tradesman will be based on his experience in traditional roofing and roof plumbing work. Provide all accessories to render the roof watertight and properly finished. traditional pattern. These shall be of

Provide all ladders and other equipment as direct by the Architect so that he may fully inspect the works.

5.2 METAL RAINWATER GOODS MATERIAL All materials for metal rainwater goods and accessories shall be in accordance with AS 2179 - Metal rainwater goods. 5.3 INCOMPATIBLE MATERIALS Avoid bringing copper into contact with galvanised steel, steel, iron or other ferrous material. No roofing or roof plumbing is to be arranged so that water runs from a copper surface on to galvanised steel. Should contact between incompatible material be unavoidable, separate with purpose made pressure sensitive tape to approval of Architect. 5.4 ROOF BATTENS

For metal roofs: 75 x 25 hardwood fixed as above.

5.5 SARKING Material: Double sided reinforced aluminium foil insulation with a flammability index not greater than 2 in accordance with AS1530-2. Installation: UOS lay sarking with 150mm lap and turned down 40mm into gutter so that water penetrating roofing will flow to gutter. Keep sarking 100mm clear of ridge to permit natural ventilation. Provide anti ponding sheeting at eaves made up of cement fibreboard or the like.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

26

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Roof & Roof Plumber

5.6 ROOF INSULATION Material: Purpose made polyester insulation bats. Where ceiling linings fixed to ceiling joists: Install 100mm thickness between joists. Secure either by use of

Walls of rooms within roof spaces: Install 100mm thickness between studs. ridged bats and covering with light galvanised netting. Where ceiling linings fixed to rafters: ABS walls in roof spaces.

5.7 LEAD FOR FLASHINGS Lead shall be either milled lead with a minimum copper content of 0.05% or direct cast method lead with a minimum copper content of 0.01%. The type and manufacture of the lead is to be approved by the Architect before the commencement of the works on the basis of a sample and details supplied by the contractor to the Architect or his representative.

5.8 LEAD WEIGHTS lb/sq.ft. __ Box gutters Hips, ridges and valleys. Over (cover) flashings to box gutters Stepped, raking & horizontal overflashings, roof penetration & apron flashings. Soaker flashings 8 40 3.5 kg/msq. Thickness (mm)

30

2.6

5 3

25 15

2.2 1.3

Lead Tacks are to be of the same weight as the flashing they fix and are to be fixed with nails compatible with adjacent metal roofing.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

27

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Roof & Roof Plumber

5.9 POINT UP Where specified 'point up', thoroughly wet open joints and flush up with mortar. Strike joint to match best of adjacent work. Compo Mortar - use for pointing up where flashings are let into walls, parapets, chimneys or the like. 10 parts sand 2 pars lime putty 1 part white Portland cement For materials see STONEMASON AND BRICKLAYER.

5.10

CORRUGATED METAL ROOFING

Replace: Where existing roofing is scheduled or shown to be 'replace' remove existing roofing and supply and fix new roofing as below. UOS or shown existing roof battens and stepped and raking over flashings are to be carefully protected in situ and reincorporated into the works. UOS supply and fix new valley and chimney gutters, apron hip and ridge flashings. Materials: Copper: 0.6mm traditional pattern corrugated copper fixed with new ferrous roofing screws and lead washers. Steel: 0.69mm traditional pattern corrugated galvanised steel (NOT Zinc/Aluminium type) fixed with galvanised steel roofing screws with lead washers. Fielders heritage profile or similar as approved by Architect. Where unsupported at side laps fix with 4mm dia. galvanised steel bolts and square nuts. Installation: Set out in single lengths without end laps. Side lap 1-1/2 corrugations. Fix and support in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations to suit the existing roof structure.

5.11

BARGE ROLLS

Materials to be same as adjacent roofing 50mm dia. to traditional profile. finish at lower ends with 75mm fabricated cone soldered to roll and upper ends with end stop.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

28

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Roof & Roof Plumber

HIP & RIDGE FLASHINGS Lead: Fix timber ridge poles of eliptical profile 70 x 50mm fin. with flattened base packed off existing ridge and hip boards. Under ridge flashing provide 50mm wide 30 kg/sq. lead tracks at 600mm centres fixed to pole with copper nails and of sufficient length to give a 30mm clasp. Dress over pole 30 kg/msq. lead ridge flashing in max. 1.8m lengths with 125mm overlap joints with tacks. In the case of hips to verandah roofs scale down dimensions of pole and lead in discussions with Architect. Copper: 0.7mm half hard copper to traditional profile with 50mm dia. roll at apex and 25mm margin at edges. Steel: 0.69mm galvanised steel to traditional profile with 50mm dia. roll at apex and 25mm margin at edges.

5.12

VALLEY GUTTERS

Lead: 30 kg/m sq. lead with 450mm cover installed in max. 2400 lengths and lapped min. 150mm turnover min 25mm at edges. Tack and clip to keep in place without fixing through lead. Copper: 0.7mm half hard copper with 450mm cover with edges turned over 40mm. Steel: 0.69mm galv. steel with 450mm cover with edges turned over 40mm. Zinc: 0.7mm half hard zinc with 450mm cover with edges turned over 40mm.

5.13 Lead:

COVER & OVERFLASHINGS Install in maximum 1800mm lengths with 150mm clipped dry laps. Let into wall a minimum of 25mm and fix at maximum 300mm centres with lead wedges. Dress down neatly min. 50mm over upstands of box gutter linings. apron flashings etc. to finish minimum 20mm clear of horizontal surface of same to prevent leakage by capillary action. Point up in compo mortar ABS. 0.7mm half hard copper. Lap joints 50mm, blind rivet and sweat solder. walls and fix ABS lead. Extend over box gutters etc. ABS Lead. 0.69 galv. steel. Install ABS Copper. 0.7mm soft zinc. Install ABS Copper. Let into

Copper:

Steel: Zinc:

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

29

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Roof & Roof Plumber

5.14 Lead:

APRON FLASHINGS 25 kg/m sq. installed in max. 1800mm lengths with 150mm clipped dry laps. Extend up wall in 75mm and out over roofing in 150mm and dress down. 0.7 half hard copper to traditional pattern with 75mm upstand and 150mm apron with 25mm margin lap 50mm, blind rivet and sweat solder. 0.69 galv. steel. Installed ABS Copper.

Copper:

Steel:

5.15

STEPPED OVERFLASHINGS

Set out to allow minimum 25mm upstand on apron and soaker flashings and to minimise overall length of flashing. Let into joint min. 25mm and fix with 2 no. lead wedges and point up ABS. Lap min. 25mm and clip lower leading edge. Trim neatly to rake of roof.

5.16

PENETRATION FLASHINGS

Shaped apron flashing with min. 50mm upstand. Cover with purpose made sleeve in penetrating pipe vent etc. Sealed with either purpose made gasket or buy soldered joint.

5.17

SOAKER FLASHINGS

15 kg/m sq. lead hooked over each course of slate or shingles with 25mm clear upstand behind raking or stepped overflashings, extending min. 150mm out over roofing and concealed by subsequent courses of roofing. 5.18 GUTTER & ROOF BOARDING

Provide and fix gutter bearers and boarding under all areas shown for new box and tapered gutters and tray roofing. Gutter boarding to be min. 15mm waterproof plywood arranged and fixed to be perfectly smooth and provide continuous support to coverings with falls as follows: Lead gutters & roofs: Steel, copper & zinc gutters & roofs 1:100 1:60

Round off all sharp edges and provide filets at acute angles. Form drips ABS TAPERED & BOX GUTTERS. Where drips are less than 75mm high form recess in drip to prevent leakage by capillary action.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

30

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Roof & Roof Plumber

5.19 Lead:

TAPERED & BOX GUTTERS Form up trays of sheet lead ABS over gutter boarding ABS mx. length 2400mm. Extend up adjacent roof slopes min. 150mm and turn over min. 25mm. UOS form 75mm high drip joints at edges of trays. Where 50mm drips are shown for recess at back of drip to prevent leakage by capillary action. Where trays abutt against vertical surfaces turn tray up min. 75mm and provide and fix cover flashing ABS. Form sumps and outlets as shown by traditional lead burned joints. Trays should overlap in loose joint to allow for thermal expansion and contraction. Lead linings are to remain in position by weight alone and no fixings are to be made through lead. 0.7mm half hard copper. Lap 30mm at joints rivet and seat solder. Provide and install in min. 50mm high drips (step downs with dry joints) at locations shown to accommodate movement by thermal expansion. Form bead (turn over) at top of raking sides of soldered joints. Form expansion joint at high point in two way gutters by butting trays to timber batten and capping over with separate capping piece. Form drips by folding lower tray under step and turning head of upper tray down over tail of lower tray to provide a min. 38mm lap in the lower tray. Allow 10mm minimum clearance for expansion at drips and gutter ends. 0.69 mm. galv. steel. Install ABS Copper. 0.7mm half hard zinc. Install ABS Copper.

Copper:

Steel: Zinc:

5.20

EAVES GUTTERS

Materials and Joints: Galvanised Steel: 0.69mm galv. steel, rivet and sweat at joints. Zinc: 0.7mm half hard zinc, rivet and sweat solder at joints. Copper: 0.7mm half hard copper, rivet and sweat solder at joints. Size & Profile: As shown or scheduled. Installation: Reinforce all angels with gussets. Return ends where they do not butt against walls etc. Set to even falls (min 1:500) and provide thimbles for connection of downpipes. Lap 30mm at joints and paint with no. 2 coats bituminous paint to internal surfaces before final fixing. Gutter brackets unless scheduled otherwise shall be of the same material and profile as the gutter. UOS support on gutter brackets at max. 900mm centres. Brackets set out to coincide with joints in guttering. Galvanised steel brackets: 40mm x 0.8mm Zinc and copper brackets: 40mm x 1.2mm

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

31

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Roof & Roof Plumber

5.21

DOWNPIPES

Material and Joints: Galvanised Steel: form from 0.69mm sheet by lock seaming. Zinc: form from 0.7mm half zinc sheet by lock seaming. Copper: form from 0.7mm half hard sheet by lock seaming. Size: 75mm dia. unless otherwise noted. Installation: Form bends, offsets, junctions and shoes, well entered and soldered at joints so that downpipes follow profile of background. Angle in downpipes shall not be less than 120 degrees so as to minimise the chances of blockage. Where downpipes abut masonry walls, fixing shall be by means of wrought iron spiked hooks driven into wedges at approximately 1800mm centres UOS.

Where downpipes are copper wrap spike in lead to avoid contact between steel and copper. Fit downpipes to discharge into upturns of drains and connect to thimble outlets of eaves gutters. Fit shoes so that downpipes discharge easily into drains. 5.22 RAINWATER HEADS

Copper: 0.7mm half hard copper. Steel: 0.69 galvanised steel. Zinc: 0.7mm half hard zinc. Fabrication: Fabricate to design shown or noted. Reinforce all angles with gussets, return ends and the like. Reinforce unsupported edges with compatible metal rods worked into sleeves to provide a strong and durable configuration. 5.23 SPREADERS

Material: To match downpipes. Fabrication: Make up with two sections of downpipes forming an inverted tee. The horizontal section shall be 600mm long and shall be perforated with 30mm diameter holes at maximum 100mm centres. The ends of the horizontal section shall be partly closed by soldering in a semi-circle stop end to the lower portion of each end. 5.24 CLEANING DOWN

At all times the roofing and gutters shall be kept free of metal particles, soldering spatter and all other debris. Thoroughly clean and wash down all roofing and guttering where cutting or soldering has been carried out. ON COMPLETION, CLEAN OUT ROOF GUTTERS AND LEAVE THE WHOLE ROOF AREA CLEAN AND IN GOOD CONDITION.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

32

September 2011

Melrose Conservation Specification

Conservation Internal linings

CONSERVATION INTERNAL LININGS

6.1 PRESERVE LATH & PLASTER Where new ceiling lining is scheduled to replace existing lath and plaster do NOT demolish old ceiling. Fit new lining over existing ceiling and fix up into ceiling framing.

6.2 INSTALLATION OF LININGS Carry out the whole of the installation in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. Ensure that noggings and other structural support for fixtures and fittings are installed before lining commences.

6.3 CORNICES 'Set Square' close fit ceiling linings to face of wall and set with setting cement ABS FINISHINGS.

6.4 EXTERNAL ANGLES Unless timber staff mould is scheduled finish with 25 x 25 x 0.5 mm thick galv. steel purpose made perforated angle.

6.5 FINISHING Tape, fill and set all recess edges and but joints to wall and ceiling sheeting and internal angles at walls with bedding and finishing cements of types and manufacture specifically approved by the manufacturer of lining. Mix and apply strictly to manufacturer's recommendations and reinforce with special reinforcing tape as supplied by manufacturer. Cover reinforcing tape and nail heads and other scuff marks well and leave free of air bubbles and other distortions.

6.6 COMPLETION Point up and make good after all other trades any cracks, defects and blemishes due to shrinkage or other cause and leave perfect prior to painting of walls and ceilings.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

33

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Plasterer

CONSERVAITON PLASTERER

7.1 GENERALLY The plasterer is to be experienced in the preparation, application and finishing of lime hair plaster. Protect adjacent surfaces, particularly roofs from defacement and damage due to droppings and traffic.

7.2 UNEXPECTED PLASTER REPLACEMENT Verify areas of existing plaster found to be unsound with Architect before replacing. No variation will be allowed for plaster replacement unless inspected before removal.

7.3 PREPARATION Remove all loose, drummy and defective work to areas scheduled for plaster replacement. Rake out joints of brickwork to a depth of 10mm. No coats shall be applied on any work until authority to proceed with plastering has been given by the Architect. Thoroughly wet all brickwork, concrete etc., and prepare surface to ensure a good key before applying plastering. Scratch or cross broom all first coats to provide key for subsequent coats.

7.4 MATERIALS Generally Lime putty - Prepared in accordance with AS CA 27-1949 - Code of recommended practice for internal plastering on solid backgrounds from quicklime as described in Section 2, part 5, (as) or from hydrated lime as described in Part 5 (b). Sand - Clean, sharp, free from impurities, from an approved source. Proportioning of materials to be made dry in proper gauge boxes before mixing, or in other approved manner. Animal hair - cow hair or alternative approved by Architect. Plaster - Gypsum plaster complying to AS A43 - Gypsum plaster for building purposes. Cement - ABS STONEMASON.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 34 September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Plasterer

7.5 LIME PLASTER Material and workmanship except where superseded by this specification shall be carried out in accordance with AS CA 27 - 1959 - Code of recommended practice for internal plastering on solid backgrounds. Surface preparation: The background must be sound and free from oil, grease, wetting agents, dirt or other loose material. Retempering: Mixes containing gypsum plaster shall be used within 30 minutes after the addition of water or liquid ingredients. Beyond this time the mix shall be discarded. No retempering shall be allowed. Rendering (scratch) and Floating (levelling) Coats One part lime putty One part hair (teased up) Three parts sand Use coarser sand for initial costs. Cure mixture minimum fourteen (14) days before using. Apply in coats of not more than 15mm thickness to avoid excessive shrinkage. Provide as many coats as is necessary to level wall at min. 15mm cover. Finishing Coat: Three parts lime putty One part gypsum plaster Finish with steel float. The final coat will need wetting and setting to eliminate crazing.

7.6 STAFF MOULDS In patching work preserve timber staff moulds. UOS new staff moulds are to be made from 19mm dia. timber dowels fixed to timber grounds and flush with surface of plaster with quirks cut to approval of Architect.

7.7 COMPO RENDER One part Portland cement Two parts lime putty Ten parts sand Mix in lime water only after initial mixing. Batch each quantity for one hour usage. Do not retemper or reuse mixes showing sign of set. Generally render 15mm thick. Where render is applied over differing base materials, run 'V' joints approximately 6mm deep accurately at line of abutment of these materials.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

35

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Plasterer

7.8 REFIXING OF EXISTING DRUMMY PLASTER/RENDER Where scheduled 'refix plaster/render' the existing wall plaster is to be carefully repaired and otherwise stabilised including the following works: a) Support with sheeting and framing as necessary to avoid collapse during the works and sufficiently to jack back plaster as below. b) Protect from weather during the work. Work over and identify all drummy areas. c) Carefully cut out 100 x 100mm squares of plaster at approximately 450mm centres to reveal inside edges of plaster that has separated from substrate. Locations of squares to be discussed with Architect before work begins. d) Remove loose particles and thoroughly dampen plaster and otherwise prepare the surfaces. Push in cornice cement as far as possible into the voids. f) Gently jack back surface of plaster so that cornice cement is compressed as much as practicable in order to achieve good adhesion. Maintain support until full adhesion of the cornice cement has been achieved. g) Replaster squares of mixing plaster in plaster mix to match existing and finish to match adjacent sound and original finishes. 7.9 TIE BACK CEILINGS & CORNICES Where scheduled 'tie back' existing cornices or lath and plaster the area nominated is to be carefully and thoroughly resupported. This is to be done in consultation with the Architect and may be achieved by either flooding the area concerned with an approved adhesive or by lacing with copper wire recessed in surface of plaster and concealed to view.

7.10

COMPLETION

Point up and make good after all other trades any cracks, defects and blemishes due to shrinkage or other cause and leave perfect prior to painting of walls and ceilings.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

36

September 2011

Melrose Conservation Specification

Conservation Glazier

CONSERVATION GLAZIER

8.1 GENERALLY New glazing shall meet the requirements of Ordinance 70, Clause 53.4. Installation and workmanship are to be in accordance with AS 1288 - Rules for installation of glass in buildings.

8.2 EXISTING GLASS Preserve and reuse all existing glass. Where sashes, doors etc. are repaired or replaced salvage glass and reuse. Check with Architect before replacing existing cracked panes.

8.3 NEW GLAZING WORKS New glass throughout to be approved manufacturer, free from air bubbles, blemishes and flaws of any description. Where not in contravention of Ordinance 70, glass to be clear float glass, thickness to match existing glazing. Should regulation require wired or otherwise non-traditional glazing, discuss with Architect prior to commencement. All new glazing to new and existing windows and doors is Low e Viridian EVantage clear or similar Provide expansion clearance for all glass in frames, sashes, etc. before glazing. All timber rebates to be primed

Putty to be linseed oil and whiteing of first quality manufactured to AS1263 - Oil based putty. Glass in timber window sashes to be back puttied, sprigged and puttied in. details. 8.4 CARE OF OLD SASHES ETC. Carefully remove old putty so as not to damage existing stiles, rails and glazing bars. Repair joinery damaged by reglazing (no variation will be allowed for this work). 8.5 OBSCURE GLASS Where obscure glass is specified provide 3 no. samples of different finishes suitable for installation in lavatory windows for selection by Architect. All to match existing

8.6 COMPLETION Carefully clean all existing and new glass on completion.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

37

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Painter, Paper Hanger & Floor finisher

CONSERVAITON PAINTER, PAPERHANGER & FLOOR FINISHER

9.1 PREPARATION All surfaces shall be cleaned, firm and dry, and shall be thoroughly prepared before the application of any paint. Unless otherwise specified do NOT remove existing paint layers. All edges of paint layers and other imperfections are to be smoothed and feathered by sanding. Mechanical disc-type sanders and water jetting shall not be used. The extent of all preparation work is to be assess by the contractor before tendering and no variation will be allowed for same.

9.2 MATERIALS All materials shall be of best respective kinds supplied on the job in sealed containers. Trade lines shall not be used. Paint shall conform to the G.P.B. (Government Paint Committee) and AS (Australian Standard) Specifications nominated.

9.3 APPLICATION The work is to be carried out by a painter, experienced in this class of work. No painting shall be carried out in damp or foggy weather nor shall painting be carried out under conditions that are not conducive to best results. Ample time shall be allowed for drying between successive coats of paint. All paint shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The finish shall be smooth and free from brush marks, and consistent with the surface to which it is applied. All preparation shall be ap-proved by the sup before applying any paint. All finishing colours shall be verified in consultation with the Architect and ' as directed if not the exact colour specified. Prior to the application of the second coat to interior spaces, approval of the colour under full artificial light conditions is to be obtained.

9.4 MOULD INHIBITOR TREATMENT Where areas are scheduled to be treated for mould, thoroughly clean surface by scrubbing down with a 10% bleach solution to remove visible mould growths. Apply one coat of anti mould solution before painting ABS. Provide samples and full technical data of anti mould solution to Architect and obtain approval before proceeding with treatment.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

38

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Painter, Paper Hanger & Floor finisher

9.5 EXTERNAL MASONRY WALLS Carefully check over all surfaces to detect all defective areas, cracks, etc. Completely remove all flaking and powdering paint from surfaces including areas where previous lime coats survive under existing coats and seal with masonry sealer. Patch all damaged areas with external filling mixture approved by the Architect, sand down and spot seal with masonry sealer. UOS all bare and patched areas to be painted with One (1) coat masonry sealer conforming to GPC-S-17/1. Two (2) coats semi gloss acrylic, conforming to AS K122 and GPC L 027. UOS surfaces in good condition to be sanded down and painted. Two (2) coats semi gloss acrylic, conforming to AS K122 and GPC L 027.

9.6 EXTERNAL WOODWORK Woodwork finished in light colours Sand down and spot prime bare areas with pink primer conforming to GPC P 18/1 and AS 2301. Putty up and make good cracks, nail holes and damaged areas and paint: One (1) coat of undercoat , GPC U-16/1 and AS 2302 One (1) coat of undercoat (tinted), GPC U-16/1 and AS 2302 One (2) coat of gloss enamel paint, GPC E-15/3 and AS TR1, Part 6. Sand down and dust off between each coat. Undercoat should be tinted to approximate colour of finish coat. Woodwork finished in dark colours. Sand down and spot prime bare areas with pink primer conforming to GPC P-18/1 sand AS 2301. Putty up and make good cracks, nail holes and damaged areas. Sand down and dust off between each coat and paint. One (1) coat of undercoat (tinted), GPC U-16/1 and AS 2302 One (2) coat of gloss enamel paint, GPC E-15/3 and AS TR1, Part 6.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

39

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Painter, Paper Hanger & Floor finisher

9.7 INTERNAL PLASTER & MASONRY Previously painted plaster and masonry walls and ceilings: Remove all loose and flaking paint. Patch all damaged areas and flush up stripped areas to level of surrounding paintwork with patching compound. Sand down. UOS all bare areas and patched surfaces to be painted with: One (1) coat acrylic sealer, GPC S-17/2 Two (2) coats low sheen acrylic, GPC L-27 (satin acrylic )GPC L-27 and AS TR1, Part 2 in bathrooms and toilets UOS surfaces in good condition: to be sanded down and painted: two (2) coats low sheen acrylic, GPC L-27 (satin acrylic ) GPC L-27 and AS TR1 Part 2 in bathrooms and toilets. New painted plaster walls and ceilings: To be thoroughly cleaned down and all imperfections made good and given: One (1) coat acrylic sealer, GPC S-17/2 Two (2) coasts low sheen acrylic, GPC L-27 (satin acrylic) GPC L-27 and AS TR1 Part 2 in bathrooms and toilets. 9.8 INTERNAL WOODWORK SCHEDULED PAINTED Existing internal painted woodwork surfaces are to be sand papered smooth, stopped with linseed oil putty then painted: One (1) undercoat (tinted), GPC U-16/1 & AS 2302. One (3) coat satin enamel, GPC E-10 & AS TR1, Part 5 Flatten finishing coat with approved flattening agent to sample approved by Architect. New woodwork is to be sand papered smooth and primed with pink primer, GPC P-18/1 and AS 2301 stopped with linseed oil putty and then painted: One (1) undercoat (tinted), GPC U-16/1 & AS 2302. One (3) coat satin enamel, GPC E-10 & AS TR1, Part 5 Flatten finishing coat with approved flattening agent to sample approved by Architect.

9.9 PAINT REPAIRS Making good: Where scheduled 'make good' surfaces shall be primed where bare metal or timber is showing, then painted with the same number and type of coats as adjacent paintwork. Finish coat to surfaces to be 'made good' shall be applied to whole areas, i.e. to nearest edge or re-entrant or salient angle. Touch up: Where scheduled 'touch up' surfaces shall be painted ABS MAKING GOOD except that finished coat is to be close match to colour and finish of existing paint and be applied only to area of new or repaired work.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

40

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Painter, Paper Hanger & Floor finisher

9.10

INTERNAL WOODWORK SCHEDULED SHELLAC

Strip joinery: Where scheduled 'strip joinery' completely strip varnish, shellac, paint or other finish from existing surfaces, using solvent type stripper or hot air gun. Clean down to bare timber and finish with 240-400 paper and steel wool. Shellac:: Where joinery is scheduled shellac apply stain and five (5) coats shellac rubbing back between coats TME. Then rub back using a pad dampened with methylated spirits and with pumice powder under the rag and then fine sand with 240-400 paper and steelwool. Finish with: to 'wax finish' apply two (2) coat of shredded bees wax in mineral turpentine medium.

9.11

INTERNAL WOODWORK SCHEDULED CLEAR GLOSS FINISH

Where scheduled 'clear gloss' finish wash surface with mineral turpentine; sand down and dust off. Apply two (2) coats of gloss clear polyurethane, GPC V/114. Sand down and dust off between each coat.

9.12

INTERNAL WOODWORK SCHEDULED GRAINED FINISH

Where scheduled grained finish prepare and paint generally as for Internal Woodwork Scheduled Painted. Allow to apply ground and graining coats to match standard of sample approved by the Architect. Apply additional coat semi-gloss clear varnish protective coating at Architect's direction.

9.13

INTERIOR & HOBS OF FIREPLACES

These are to be painted: Two (2) coats heat proof paint TME 9.14 DOOR STEPS & HEARTHS

Allow to paint external door steps (excluding slate thresholds) and internal outer hearths (if not good stone). Two (2) coats black paving paint, GPC P93/1. 9.15 FLOORS SCHEDULED TUNG OIL

Existing floors are to be cleaned to approval, which may include removing existing finishes. All new patches to be stained and finished to match the existing floor and the whole of the floor coated with 3 coats of timber floor shellac Feast Watson or similar approved by the architect and rubbed back between coats. Provide sample area of floor finish for approval of Architect before proceeding further.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

41

September 2011

Conservation Specification

Conservation Painter, Paper Hanger & Floor finisher

9.16

FLOORS SCHEDULED SCRUBBED FINISH

Floors are to be thoroughly scrubbed with sand soap and a bristle brush to a spotless standard.

9.17

WALLS SCHEDULED LIME WASH FINISH

Where 'limewash' finish is scheduled remove and/or cut back all existing paint finishes, thoroughly clean, sand and dust down. Fill cracked and broken areas with lime/sand stopping and level to existing surface. Then apply: Two (2) coats of lime wash prepared as follows: Make 8 gallons of lime putty, put in colour while slaking, sieve and allow to cool. NB: fine sieving is necessary to give limewash a smooth finish. Add 5lb of dry calcium chloride mixed with water and added to lime putty to give desired consistency. Then add 4lb of Alum powder and 1 gallon of hot tallow. Mix well, sieve and strain and apply two (2) coats. The mixture is to be applied hot. It should be quite thin and semi-transparent on application (it will colour as it dries). The finished surface should be smooth with a slight lustre and free from particles of undissolved lime and other ingredients.

9.18

WALLPAPER SCHEDULED CONSERVE

Specialist wallpaper conservation consultant to complete these works in accordance with NSW Heritage Guidelines and Burra Charter

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

42

September 2011

Melrose Specification

NEW WORK / GENERAL SPECIFICATION

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

43

September 2011

Melrose specification

Preliminaries (interiors and alterations)

PRELIMINARIES (INTERIORS AND ALTERATIONS)

1 1.1

GENERAL GENERAL

Interpretation General: The words principal, and contract administrator have the same meaning, respectively, as owner and architect, unless the context requires otherwise. Cross reference: The clause Interpretation, in the General requirements worksection, also applies. 1.2 THE SITE

Site restrictions Entry permits: Make available, to persons entering designated secure areas, valid entry permits. Ensure these persons comply with conditions of entry. List: At least 10 working days before entry is required, submit the full name, address, and date and place of birth of persons required to enter designated secure areas. - Purpose of submission: Review. Working hours General building activities: As per local council conditions Activities involving structure born sound or vibration: As per local council conditions Protection of persons and property Temporary works: Provide and maintain required hoardings, barricades, guards, fencing, shoring, temporary roadways, footpaths, signs, lighting, watching and traffic flagging. Existing services General: Attend to existing services as follows: - If the service is to be continued, repair, divert or relocate. Submit details. - If the service is to be abandoned, remove redundant parts and make safe. Proposals: Submit proposals for action to be taken with respect to existing services before starting this work. Minimise the number and duration of interruptions. - Purpose of submission: For review. Adjoining tenancies Notice: At least 10 working days before commencing work, submit to owners and occupants of adjoining tenancies written notice of intention to commence work and an outline description of the type and extent of work. 1.3 PLANT

Access roads Parking Owners existing parking areas: Use only designated parking areas. - Location: On site Use of existing services General: Existing services may be used as temporary services for the performance of the contract subject to conditions stated in the Existing services schedule.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

44

"[Insert date]"

Melrose specification

Preliminaries (interiors and alterations)

Existing services schedule Service Electricity Water

Conditions of use Provide metering and reimburse owner Provide metering and reimburse owner

Protective clothing Protective clothing: Make available protective clothing for the use of visitors. - Safety helmets: To AS/NZS 1801, Type 1. - Certification: Required. . Certification provider: An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand (JAS-ANZ). Project signboards General: Provide project-specific signboards and the following: - Locate where directed. - Maintain in good condition for duration of the work. - Obtain permission for removal. - Remove on completion. Project signboard description Location: Front gate Size: A1 Text, graphics: To contain image of the site and Architects and consultants details Other details: Draft to be provided for feedback and approval of Architect. 1.4 BUILDING THE WORKS

Safety Accidents: Promptly notify the architect of the occurrence of the following: - Accidents involving death or personal injury. - Accidents involving loss of time. - Incidents with accident potential such as equipment failure, slides and cave-ins. Accident reports: Submit reports of accidents. - Purpose of submission: Information only. Contractor's representative General: Must be accessible, and fluent in English and technical terminology. Subcontracting General: Submit a complete list of proposed subcontractors and suppliers. Program of work Construction program: Show the following: - Sequence of work. - Critical paths of activities related to the work. - Allowance for holidays. - Activity inter-relationships. - External dependencies including provision of access, document approvals and work by others. - Periods within which various stages or parts of the work are to be executed. Time scale: Working days. Updated program: Identify changes since the previous issue, and show the estimated percentage of completion for each item of work. Program chart: Display in the contractors site office an up-to-date bar chart and network diagram based on the construction program.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

45

"[Insert date]"

Melrose specification

Preliminaries (interiors and alterations)

Site meetings General: Hold and attend site meetings throughout the contract and ensure attendance of appropriate subcontractors, the architect, and appropriate consultants. Frequency: Weekly or fortnightly, as directed by Architect. Minutes: Architect to keep minutes of site meetings. Contacts: At the first site meeting, submit names and telephone numbers of responsible persons who may be contacted after hours during the course of the contract. - Purpose of submission: Information only. Progress photographs General: Take colour progress photographs within 5 working days before each site meeting. At each site meeting submit 2 sets of glossy prints, and the digital files. Identify the project, date, time, location and orientation. Purpose of submission: Information only. Minimum frequency: Weekly Minimum number: 20 Format: Standard photograph (4x6) and digital format. Items supplied by owner General: Materials and other items identified in the Items to be supplied schedule will be supplied free of charge to the contractor for installation in the execution of the works. Unload and take delivery of them, inspect them for defects and then take care of them. If defects are found, advise. Return unused items to the owner. Critical services Temporary interruptions: Submit proposals for maintaining after hours protection for: - Fire protection services. - Building security systems. Purpose of submission: Information only. Final cleaning General: Before practical completion, clean throughout the works. Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Remove waste and surplus materials. Samples: Remove non-incorporated samples, prototypes and sample panels. Reinstatement General: Before practical completion, clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work and restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Removal of plant General: Within 10 working days after practical completion, remove temporary works and construction plant no longer required. Remove the balance before the end of the defects liability period. 1.5 PAYMENT FOR THE WORKS

Anticipated progress claims schedule General: At commencement of the works, submit a schedule of anticipated progress claims for the contract period. Submit a revised schedule with each progress claim. Purpose of submission: Information only. Progress claims Break-down: With each progress claim, submit a statement of amounts claimed in respect of each worksection or trade heading designated in the specification. Purpose of submission: Review. Method of measurement General: In accordance with the principles of the Australian Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works (ASMM). Other civil engineering work: To AS 1181.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

46

"[Insert date]"

Melrose specification

Preliminaries (interiors and alterations)

1.6

MISCELLANEOUS

Contractor and owner to observe confidentiality Publicity: Do not issue information concerning the project for publication in the media without prior written approval of the owner. Refer to the owner enquiries from the media concerning the project. Compliance with the law Requirements of authorities: The owner, before entering into the contract, has given the notices, paid the fees, and obtained the permits, approvals and other authorisations stated in the Prior applications and approvals schedule. Prior applications and approvals schedule Prior notices given and applications made Development application approval Construction certificate Section 60 approval Fees paid Yes Yes Yes Permits, approvals and authorisations received Yes Prior to commencement of work Prior to commencement of work

Authority conditions schedule Authority Document Blacktown City Council Development application conditions of consent Blacktown City Council NSW Heritage office Construction certificate Development application conditions of consent, Construction certificate, Section 60 approval

Condition All requirements to be complied with All requirements to be complied with All requirements to be complied with

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

47

"[Insert date]"

Melrose specification

General requirements

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

Performance Structural: If required, provide structures, installations and components as follows: - Fixed accessways: To AS 1657. - Structural design actions: To AS/NZS 1170.0 and the Structural design actions schedule. Design Design by contractor: If the contractor provides design, use only appropriately qualified persons and conform to all statutory requirements. Conflict with the documents: If it is believed that a conflict exists between statutory requirements and the documents, notify the contract administrator immediately and provide a recommendation to resolve the conflict. Noise levels General: Install systems in conformance with the Noise level schedule and within the limits of the contract design and documented equipment performance. 1.2 PRECEDENCE

General Worksections and referenced documents: - The requirements of other worksections of the specification override conflicting requirements of this worksection. - The requirements of the worksections override conflicting requirements of their referenced documents. - The requirements of the referenced documents are minimum requirements. 1.3 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - Demolition. - Service trenching. Common requirements Requirement: Conform to the following: - Adhesives, sealants and fasteners. - Fire-stopping. - Metals and prefinishes. - Termite management. - Timber products, finishes and treatment. - Building IT components. Cross referencing styles Within the text: - Worksection titles are indicated by Italicised text. - Subsection titles are indicated by BOLD text. - Clause titles are indicated by Bold text. 1.4 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

Contractual relationships General: Responsibilities and duties of the principal, contractor and contract administrator are not altered by requirements in the documents referenced in this specification.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 48 September 2011

Melrose specification

General requirements

Current editions General: Use referenced documents which are the editions, with amendments, current 3 months before the closing date for tenders, except where other editions or amendments are required by statutory authorities. 1.5 INTERPRETATION

Abbreviations General: For the purposes of this specification the following abbreviations apply: - AS: Australian Standard. - BCA: Building Code of Australia. - EMC: Electromagnetic compatibility. - MSDS: Material safety data sheets. - NATA: National Association of Testing Authorities. - NZS: New Zealand Standard. - VOC: Volatile organic compound. - DA: Development application - CC: Construction certificate Definitions General: For the purposes of this specification, the definitions given below apply. - Attendance: Attendance, provide attendance and similar expressions mean give assistance for examination and testing. - Contract administrator: Contract administrator has the same meaning as architect or superintendent and is the person appointed by the owner or principal under the contract. - Default: Specified value, product or installation method which is to be provided unless otherwise documented. - Design life: The period of time for which it is assumed, in the design, that an asset will be able to perform its intended purpose with only anticipated maintenance but no major repair or replacement being necessary. - Documented: Documented, as documented and similar terms mean contained in the contract documents. - Economic life: The period of time from the acquisition of an asset to when the asset, while still physically capable of fulfilling its function and with only anticipated maintenance, ceases to be the lowest cost alternative for satisfying that function. - Geotechnical site investigation: The process of evaluating the geotechnical characteristics of the site in the context of existing or proposed construction. - Give notice: Give notice, submit, advise, inform and similar expressions mean give notice (submit, advise, inform) in writing to the contract administrator. - High level interface: Systems transfer information in a digital format using an open system interface. - Hold point: The activity cannot proceed without the approval of the contract administrator. - Hot-dip galvanized: Zinc coated to AS/NZS 4680 after fabrication with coating thickness and mass to AS/NZS 4680 Table 1. - IP: IP, IP code, IP rating and similar expression have the same meaning as IP Code in AS 60529. - Joints: . Construction joint: A joint with continuous reinforcement provided to suit construction sequence. . Control joint: An unreinforced joint between or within discrete elements of construction which allows for relative movement of the elements. * Contraction joint: An opening control joint with a bond breaking coating separating the joint surfaces to allow independent and controlled contraction of different parts or components, induced by shrinkage, temperature changes or other causes. It may include unbound dowels to assist vertical deflection control.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

49

September 2011

Melrose specification

General requirements

* Expansion joint: A closing control joint with the joint surfaces separated by a compressible filler to allow axial movement due to thermal expansion or contraction with changes in temperature or creep. It may include unbound dowels to assist vertical deflection control. * Isolation joint: A joint between elements of a structure designed to isolate structural movement while permitting horizontal and/or vertical movement between abutting elements . Weakened plane joint: A contraction joint created by forming a groove, extending at least one quarter the depth of the section, either by using a grooving tool, by sawing, or by inserting a premoulded strip. . Structural control joint: A control joints (contraction, expansion and isolation) in structural elements when used with applied material and finishes. . Substrate joint: A joint in the substrate which includes construction joints and joints between different materials. . Sealant joint: A joint filled with a flexible synthetic compound which adheres to surfaces within the joint to prevent the passage of dust, moisture and gases. Local government authority: A body established for the purposes of local government by or under a law applying in a state or territory. Low level interface: Systems transfer information via terminals and voltage free contacts. Metallic-coated: Steel coated with zinc or aluminium-zinc alloy as follows: . Metallic-coated steel sheet: To AS 1397. Metal thicknesses specified are base metal thicknesses. . Ferrous open sections zinc coated by an in-line process: To AS/NZS 4791. . Ferrous hollow sections zinc coated by a continuous or specialised process: To AS/NZS 4792. Network Utility Operator: A person who undertakes the piped distribution of drinking water or natural gas for supply or is the operator of a sewerage system or a stormwater system. Network Distributor: Body responsible for the distribution and control of electricity. Obtain: Obtain, seek and similar expressions mean obtain (seek) in writing from the contract administrator. Practical completion or Defects free completion: The requirements for these stages of completion are defined in the relevant building contract for the project. Pipe: Includes pipe and tube. Principal: Principal has the same meaning as owner, client and proprietor and is the party to whom the contractor is legally bound to construct the works. Professional engineer: A person who is listed on the National Professional Engineers Register (NPER) in the relevant discipline at the relevant time. Proprietary: Proprietary means identifiable by naming manufacturer, supplier, installer, trade name, brand name, catalogue or reference number. Provide: Provide and similar expressions mean supply and install and include development of the design beyond that documented. Readily accessible: To AS/NZS 3000. Registered testing authority: . An organisation registered by the National Association of Testing Authorities (NATA) to test in the relevant field; or . An organisation outside Australia registered by an authority recognised by NATA through a mutual recognition agreement; or . An organisation recognised as being a Registered Testing Authority under legislation at the time the test was undertaken. Required: Means required by the documents, the local council or statutory authorities. If required: A conditional specification term for work which may be shown in the documents or is a legislative requirement. Samples: Includes samples, prototypes and sample panels. Statutory authority: A public sector entity created by legislation, that is, a specific law of the Commonwealth. Supply: Supply, furnish and similar expressions mean supply only.
50 September 2011

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

Melrose specification

General requirements

- Tests: . Pre-completion tests: Tests carried out before completion tests. * Type tests: Tests carried out on an item identical with a production item, before delivery to the site. * Production tests: Tests carried out on a purchased item, before delivery to the site. * Progressive tests: Tests carried out during installation to demonstrate performance in according with this specification. * Site tests: Tests carried out on site. . Completion tests: Tests carried out on completed installations or systems and fully resolved before the date for , to demonstrate that the installation or system, including components, controls and equipment, operates correctly, safely and efficiently, and meets performance and other requirements. The contract administrator may direct that completion tests be carried out after the date for practical completion. - Tolerance: The permitted difference between the upper limit and the lower limit of dimension, value or quantity. - Verification: Provision of evidence or proof that a performance requirement has been met or a default exists. - Witness points: Provides an opportunity to attend an activity but does not involve an obligation. The activity can proceed without approval from the contract administrator. 1.6 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Services diagrammatic layouts General: Layouts of service lines, plant and equipment shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only, except where figured dimensions are provided or calculable. Before commencing work: - Obtain measurements and other necessary information. - Coordinate the design and installation in conjunction with all trades. Levels General: Spot levels take precedence over contour lines and ground profile lines. Drawings and manuals for existing services Warranty: No warranty is given as to the completeness or accuracy of drawings and/or manuals of existing services. 1.7 INSPECTION

Notice Concealment: If notice of inspection is required in respect of parts of the works that are to be concealed, advise when the inspection can be made before concealment. Tests: Give notice of the time and place of documented tests. Minimum notice for inspections to be made and for witnessing of tests: Conform to the Notices schedule. Light level requirements: to AS/NZS 1680.2.4. Attendance General: Provide attendance for documented inspections and tests. 1.8 SUBMISSIONS

General Submit to: Architect and Owner Default timing: Make submissions at least 5 working days before ordering products for, or starting installation of, the respective portion of the works. Program: Allow in the construction program for at least the following times for response to submissions: - Shop drawings 5 working days - Samples and prototypes: 10 working days - Manufacturers or suppliers recommendations: 5 working days
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 51 September 2011

Melrose specification

General requirements

- Product data: 5 working days - Product/design substitution or modification: 5 working days Proposed products schedules: If major products are not specified as proprietary items, submit a schedule of those proposed for use within 3 weeks of site possession. Identification General: Identify the project, contractor, subcontractor or supplier, manufacturer, applicable product, model number and options, as appropriate and include pertinent contract document references. Include service connection requirements and product certification. Non-compliance: Identify proposals for non-compliance with project requirements, and characteristics which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work. Errors General: If a submission contains errors, make a new or amended submission as appropriate, indicating changes made since the previous submission. Submissions - electronic copies File format: PDF Transmission medium: Disk and email Submissions - hard copy Quantity: 1 - Loose documents larger than A3: One transparency on heavyweight plastic film the same size as the standard contract drawings. - Loose documents up to and including A3: One copy. Authorities Authorities approvals: Submit documents showing approval by the authorities whose requirements apply to the work. Correspondence: Submit copies of correspondence and notes of meetings with authorities whose requirements apply to the work. Building penetrations General: If it is proposed to penetrate or fix to the following, submit details of the methods proposed to maintain the required structural, fire and other properties: - Structural building elements including external walls, fire walls, fire doors and access panels, other tested and rated assemblies or elements, floor slabs and beams. - Membrane elements including damp-proof courses, waterproofing membranes and roof coverings. If penetrating membranes, provide a waterproof seal between the membrane and the penetrating component. Certification General: Submit certification that the plant and equipment submitted meets all requirements of the contract documents. Execution details General: Before starting the installation of building services, submit the following: - Embedded services: Proposed method for embedding services in concrete walls or floors or chasing into concrete or masonry walls. - Fixing of services: Typical details of locations, types and methods of fixing services to the building structure. - Inaccessible services: If services will be enclosed and not accessible after completion, submit proposals for location of service runs and fittings. Inspection and testing General: Submit an inspection and testing plan which is consistent with the construction program. Include particulars of test stages and procedures. Test reports: Submit written reports on nominated tests. Materials and components Product certification: If products must conform to product certification schemes, submit evidence of conformance. Product data: For proprietary equipment, submit the manufacturers product data as follows:
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 52 September 2011

Melrose specification

General requirements

- Technical specifications and drawings. - Type-test reports. - Performance and rating tables. - Recommendations for installation and maintenance. Substitutions Identified proprietary items: Identification of a proprietary item does not necessarily imply exclusive preference for the item so identified, but indicates the necessary properties of the item. Alternatives: If alternatives to the documented products, methods or systems are proposed, submit sufficient information to permit evaluation of the proposed alternatives, including the following: - Evidence that the performance is equal to or greater than that specified. - Evidence of conformity to a cited standard. - Samples. - Essential technical information, in English. - Reasons for the proposed substitutions. - Statement of the extent of revisions to the contract documents. - Statement of the extent of revisions to the construction program. - Statement of cost implications including costs outside the contract. - Statement of consequent alterations to other parts of the works. Availability: If the documented products or systems are unavailable within the time constraints of the construction program, submit evidence. Criteria: If the substitution is for any reason other than unavailability, submit evidence that the substitution: - Is of net enhanced value to the principal. - Is consistent with the contract documents and is as effective as the identified item, detail or method. Samples Submission: Submit nominated samples. Incorporation of samples: If it is intended to incorporate samples into the works, submit proposals. Incorporate samples in the works which have been endorsed for inclusion. Do not incorporate other samples. Retention of samples: Keep endorsed samples in good condition on site, until the date of practical completion. Shop drawings General: Include dimensioned drawings showing details of the fabrication and installation of structural elements, building components, services and equipment, including relationship to building structure and other services, cable type and size, and marking details. Diagrammatic layouts: Coordinate work shown diagrammatically in the contract documents, and submit dimensioned set-out drawings. Services coordination: Coordinate with other building and service elements. Show adjusted positions on the shop and record drawings. Space requirements: Check space requirements of equipment and services indicated diagrammatically in the contract documents. Submission medium: Hardcopy and digital PDF Drawing size: A3 or A1 Checking: Ensure that the drawings have been checked before submission. Building work drawings for building services: Submit detailed dimensioned drawings showing all: - Access doors and panels. - Conduits to be cast in slabs. - Holding down bolts and other anchorage and/or fixings required complete with loads to be imposed on the structure during installation and operation. - Openings, penetrations and block-outs. - Sleeves.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 53 September 2011

Melrose specification

General requirements

- Plinths, kerbs and bases. - Required external openings. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS GENERAL

Manufacturers or suppliers recommendations General: Provide and select, if no selection is given, transport, deliver, store, handle, protect, finish, adjust and prepare for use the manufactured items in accordance with the current written recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer or supplier. Proprietary items/systems/assemblies: Assemble, install or fix to substrate in accordance with the current written recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer or supplier. Project modifications: Advise of activities that supplement, or are contrary to, manufacturers' or suppliers written recommendations and instructions. Sealed containers General: If materials or products are supplied by the manufacturer in closed or sealed containers or packages, bring the materials or products to point of use in the original containers or packages. Prohibited materials Do not provide the following: - Materials listed in the Safe Work Australia Hazardous Substances Information System (HSIS). - Materials that use chlorofluorocarbon (CFC) or hydro chlorofluorocarbon (HCFC) in the manufacturing process. 2.2 TESTS

Attendance General: Provide attendance on tests. Testing authorities General: Except for site tests, have tests carried out by a Registered testing authority and submit test reports. - Reports: Submit copies of test reports, including certificates for type tests, showing the observations and results of tests and conformance or non-conformance with requirements. - Site tests: Use instruments calibrated by authorities accredited by a Registered testing authority. 2.3 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

Consistency General: For each material or product use the same manufacturer or source and provide consistent type, size, quality and appearance. Corrosion resistance General: Conform to the following atmospheric corrosivity category as defined in AS/NZS 2312. Situation The following classification of situation applies to the Corrosion resistance and durability tables. - Internal: Building fabric protected from salt and moisture by vapour barriers, sarking, sheathing and building wraps. - External: Includes external leaf and air spaces behind external leaf brickwork or blockwork walls. Galvanizing Severe conditions: Galvanize mild steel components (including fasteners) to AS 1214 or AS/NZS 4680 as appropriate, if: - Exposed to weather. - Embedded in masonry. - Exposed to or in air spaces behind the external leaf of masonry walls. - In contact with chemically treated timber, other than copper chrome arsenate (CCA).

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

54

September 2011

Melrose specification

General requirements

PVC products Verification: Provide third party verification to demonstrate that PVC products proposed for the project satisfy the criteria required by the GBCA for their Credit in the Materials category of Green star assessment. Bushfire resistance Bushfire Attack Level (BAL) to AS 3959 3 3.1 EXECUTION OFF SITE DISPOSAL

Removal of material General: Dispose of building waste material off site to the requirements of the relevant authorities and as per the DA conditons 3.2 WALL CHASING

Holes and chases General: If holes and chases are required in masonry walls, provide proposals to demonstrate that the structural integrity of the wall is maintained. Do not chase walls nominated as fire or acoustic rated. Parallel chases or recesses on opposite faces of a wall: Not closer than 600 mm to each other. Chasing of blockwork: Only in core-filled hollow blocks or in solid blocks which are not designated as structural and to the Concrete blockwork chasing table. Concrete blockwork chasing table Block thickness (mm) Depth of chase (maximum mm) 190 35 140 25 90 20 3.3 FIXING

General Suitability: If equipment is not suitable for fixing to non-structural building elements, fix directly to structure and trim around penetrations in non-structural elements. Fasteners General: Use proprietary fasteners capable of transmitting the loads imposed, and sufficient to ensure the rigidity of the assembly. 3.4 SERVICES CONNECTIONS

Connections General: Connect to network distributor services or service points. Excavate to locate and expose connection points. Reinstate the surfaces and facilities that have been disturbed. Network distributors requirements General: If the network distributor elects to perform or supply part of the works, make the necessary arrangements. Install equipment supplied, but not installed, by the authorities. 3.5 SERVICES INSTALLATION

General Fixing: If non-structural building elements are not suitable for fixing services to, fix directly to structure and trim around holes or penetrations in non-structural elements. Installation: Install equipment and services plumb, fix securely and organise reticulated services neatly. Allow for movement in both structure and services. Concealment: Unless otherwise documented, conceal all cables, ducts, trays and pipes except where installed in plant spaces, ceiling spaces and riser cupboards. If possible, do not locate on external walls. Lifting: Provide heavy items of equipment with permanent fixtures for lifting as recommended by the manufacturer.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

55

September 2011

Melrose specification

General requirements

Suspended ground floors: Keep all parts of services under suspended ground floors at least 150 mm clear of the ground surface. Make sure services do not impede access. Arrangement: Arrange services so that services running together are parallel with each other and with adjacent building elements. Dissimilar metals: Join dissimilar metals with fittings of electrolytically compatible material. Temporary capping: During construction protect open ends of pipe with metal or plastic covers or caps. Piping General: Install piping in straight lines at uniform grades without sags. Arrange to prevent air locks. Provide sufficient unions, flanges and isolating valves to allow removal of piping and fittings for maintenance or replacement of plant. Spacing: Provide at least 25 mm clear between pipes and between pipes and building elements, additional to insulation. Changes of direction: Provide long radius elbows or bends and sets where practicable, and swept branch connections. Provide elbows or short radius bends where pipes are led up or along walls and then through to fixtures. Do not provide mitred fittings. Vibration: Arrange and support piping so that it remains free from vibration whilst permitting necessary movements. Minimise the number of joints. Embedded pipes: Do not embed pipes that operate under pressure in concrete or surfacing material. Valve groupings: If possible, locate valves in groups. Pressure testing precautions: Isolate items not rated for the test pressure. Restrain pipes and equipment to prevent movement during pressure testing. Differential movement General: If the geotechnical site investigation report predicts differential movements between buildings and the ground in which pipes or conduits are buried, provide control joints in the pipes or conduits, as follows: - Location: Adjacent to the pipe or conduit supports which are closest to the perimeter of the building. - Arrangement: Arrange pipes and conduits to minimise the number of control joints. - Magnitude: Accommodate the predicted movements. 3.6 BUILDING PENETRATIONS

Penetrations Fire rated building elements: Seal penetrations with a system conforming to AS 4072.1. Non-fire rated building elements: Seal penetrations around conduits and sleeves. Seal around cables within sleeves. If the building element is acoustically rated, maintain the rating. Sleeves General: If piping or conduit penetrates building elements, provide metal or PVC sleeves formed from pipe sections as follows: - Movement: Arrange to permit normal pipe or conduit movement. - Diameter (for non fire-rated building elements): Sufficient to provide an annular space around the pipe or pipe insulation of at least 12 mm. - Prime paint ferrous surfaces. - Terminations: . If cover plates are fitted: Flush with the finished building surface. . In fire-rated and acoustic-rated building elements: 50 mm beyond finished building surface. . In floors draining to floor wastes: 50 mm above finished floor. . Elsewhere: 5 mm beyond finished building surface. - Termite management: To AS 3660.1. - Thickness: . Metal: 1 mm. . PVC: 3 mm. Sleeves for cables: For penetrations of cables not enclosed in conduit through ground floor slabs, beams and external walls provide sleeves formed from PVC pipe sections.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 56 September 2011

Melrose specification

General requirements

3.7

CONCRETE PLINTHS

Construction General: Provide plinths conforming to the Concrete plinths schedule. 3.8 SUPPORT AND STRUCTURES

General Requirement: Provide incidental supports and structures to suit the services. 3.9 PIPE SUPPORTS

Support systems General: Provide proprietary support systems of metallic-coated steel construction. Vertical pipes: Provide anchors and guides to maintain long pipes in position, and supports to balance the mass of the pipe and its contents. Saddles: Do not provide saddle type supports for pipes > DN 25. Dissimilar metals: If pipe and support materials are dissimilar, provide industrial grade electrically nonconductive material securely bonded to the pipe to separate them. Provide fixings of electrolytically compatible material. Uninsulated pipes: Clamp piping supports directly to pipes. Insulated pipes: - Spacers: Provide spacers at least as thick as the insulation between piping supports and pipes. Extend either side of the support by at least 20 mm. - Spacer material: Rigid insulation material of sufficient strength to support the piping and suitable for the temperature application. Support spacing Cold and heated water pipes: To AS/NZS 3500.1 Table 5.2. Provide additional brackets, clips or hangers to prevent pipe movement caused by water pressure effects. Sanitary plumbing: To AS/NZS 3500.2 Table 9.1. Fuel gas: To AS 5601 Table 5.5. Other pipes: To AS/NZS 3500.1 Table 5.2. Hangers Conform to the Hanger size table. Hanger size table Nominal pipe size (DN) Minimum hanger diameter (mm) for single hangers 50 9.5 65 to 90 12.7 100 to 125 15.8 150 to 200 19.0 3.10 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ACCESS General Services and equipment: Locate and arrange all services and equipment so that: - They comply with the relevant requirements of the appropriate Occupational Health and Safety regulations. - Failure of plant and equipment (including leaks) does not create a hazard for the building occupants. - Failure of plant and equipment (including leaks) cause a minimum or no damage to the building, its finishes and contents including water sensitive equipment or finishes. - Safe tray and an overflow pipe are provided to each tank, hot water heater and storage vessel. - Piping: Provide access and clearance at fittings which require maintenance or servicing, including control valves and joints intended to permit pipe removal. Arrange piping so that it does not interfere

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

57

September 2011

Melrose specification

General requirements

with the removal or servicing of associated equipment or valves or block access or ventilation openings. - Services and equipment are readily accessible for inspection and maintenance and arranged so that inspection and maintenance can be carried out in a safe and efficient manner. Include the following: . Conform to the relevant requirements of AS 1470, AS 1657, AS/NZS 1892.1, AS 2865 and AS/NZS 3666.1. . Minimise inconvenience and disruption to building occupants or damage to the building structure or finishes. . Locate plant (including high level tanks) requiring regular inspection and maintenance so it is either safely and readily accessible from floor level or provide permanent access platforms and ladders. - In false ceilings, locate items of equipment that require inspection and maintenance above tiled parts. If not possible, provide access panels where located above set plaster or other inaccessible ceilings. Arrange services and plant locations to reduce the number of access panels. Coordinate with other trades to use common access panels where feasible. - Modify manufacturers standard equipment when necessary to provide the plant access in the contract documents. 3.11 VIBRATION SUPPRESSION Standard Rotating and reciprocating machinery noise and vibration: Vibration severity in Zone A to AS 2625.1 and AS 2625.4. General General: Minimise the transmission of vibration from rotating or reciprocating equipment to other building elements. Speeds General: If no maximum speed is prescribed do not exceed 1500 r/min for direct driven equipment. Connections General: Provide flexible connections to rotating machinery and assemblies containing rotating machinery. Isolate pipes by incorporating sufficient flexibility into the pipework or by use of proprietary flexible pipe connections installed so that no stress is placed on pipes due to end reaction. Inertia bases General: If necessary to achieve the required level of vibration isolation, provide inertia bases having appropriate mass and conforming as follows: - Construction: Steel or steel-framed reinforced concrete. Position foundation bolts for equipment before pouring concrete. - Supports: Support on vibration isolation mountings using height saving support brackets. Vibration isolation mountings General: Except for external equipment that is not connected to the structure of any building, support rotating or reciprocating equipment on mountings as follows: - For static deflections < 15 mm: Single or double deflection neoprene in-shear mountings incorporating steel top and base plates and a tapped hole for bolting to equipment. - For static deflections 15 mm: Spring mountings. Selection: Provide mountings selected to achieve 95% isolation efficiency at the normal operating speeds of the equipment. Installation: Set and adjust vibration isolation mounting supports to give clearance for free movement of the supports. Spring mountings: Provide freestanding laterally stable springs as follows: - Clearances: 12 mm between springs and other members such as bolts and housing. - High frequency isolation: 5 mm neoprene acoustic isolation pads between baseplate and support. - Levelling: Provide bolts and lock nuts. - Minimum travel to solid: 150% of the designated minimum static deflection. - Ratio of mean coil diameter to compressed length at the designated minimum static deflection: 0.8:1.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 58 September 2011

Melrose specification

General requirements

- Snubbing: Snub the springs to prevent bounce at start-up. - Vertical resilient limit stops: To prevent spring extension when unloaded, to serve as blocking during erection and which remain out of contact during normal operation. 3.12 SEISMIC RESTRAINT OF BUILDING SERVICES Provisions General: Arrange all components, other than service items exempted in AS 1170.4, to resist seismic loads determined in accordance with AS 1170.4. Securely fix all plant and equipment to the building structure. Do not rely on gravity and/or friction to resist seismic forces. Anti-vibration mounts: Use horizontally restrained type. Components: Do not use components that will be damaged by earthquake conditions. Protect systems against the adverse effects of components such as mercury switches that, although not damaged by earthquake, may malfunction. 3.13 FINISHES TO BUILDING SERVICES General General: If exposed to view (including in plant rooms), paint new building services and equipment. Surfaces painted or finished off-site: Conform to the Metals and prefinishes worksection. Exceptions: Do not paint chromium or nickel plating, anodised aluminium, GRP, stainless steel, nonmetallic flexible materials and normally lubricated machined surfaces. Surfaces with finishes applied off-site need not be re-painted on-site provided the corrosion resistance of the finish is not less than that of the respective finish documented. Standard General: Conform to the recommendations of AS/NZS 2311 Sections 3, 6 and 7 or AS/NZS 2312 Sections 5, 8 and 10, as applicable. Powder coating Standard: - Aluminium for architectural applications: To AS 3715. - Other metals: To AS 4506. Painting systems New unpainted interior surfaces: To AS/NZS 2311 Table 5.1. New unpainted exterior surfaces: To AAS/NZS 2311 Table 5.2. Paint application Coats: Apply the first coat immediately after substrate preparation and before contamination of the substrate can occur. Ensure each coat of paint or clear finish is uniform in colour, gloss, thickness and texture and free of runs, sags, blisters or other discontinuities. Combinations: Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system. Protection: Remove fixtures before starting to paint and refix in position undamaged when painting is complete. Underground metal piping Corrosion protection: Provide corrosion protection for the following: - Underground ferrous piping. - Underground non-ferrous metal piping in corrosive environments. Protection methods: Select from the following: - Cathodic protection: Sacrificial anodes or impressed current. Incorporate a facility for periodic testing. Conform to the recommendations of AS 2832.1. - Continuous wrapping using proprietary petroleum taping material. - Impermeable flexible plastic coating. - Sealed polyethylene sleeve. Low VOC emitting paints Provide the following low odour/low environmental impact paint types with the following VOC limits: - Primers and undercoats: < 65 g/litre. - Low gloss white or light coloured latex paints for broadwall areas: < 16 g/litre.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 59 September 2011

Melrose specification

General requirements

- Coloured low gloss latex paints: < 16 g/litre. - Gloss latex paints: < 75 g/litre. 3.14 MARKING AND LABELLING General General: Mark services and equipment to provide a ready means of identification and as follows: - Locations exposed to weather: Provide durable materials. - Pipes, conduits and ducts: Identify and label to AS 1345 throughout its length, including in concealed spaces. - Cables: Label to indicate the origin and destination of the cable. Consistency: Label and mark equipment using a consistent scheme across all services elements of the project. Electrical accessories General: Label isolating switches and outlets to identify circuit origin. Equipment concealed in ceilings Location: Provide a label on the ceiling indicating the location of each concealed item requiring access for routine inspection, maintenance and/or operation. In tiled ceilings locate the label on the ceiling grid closest to the item access point. In flush ceilings locate adjacent to closest access panel. Items to be labelled include but are not limited to: - Fan coil units and terminal equipment (e.g. VAV boxes). - Fire and smoke dampers. - Isolating valves not directly connected to items otherwise labelled. - Motorised dampers. - Wall mounted equipment in occupied areas: Provide labels on wall mounted items in occupied areas including the following: - Services control switches. - Temperature and humidity sensors. Points lists Automatic control points: Provide plasticised, fade-free points lists for each automatic control panel. Store in a pocket on the door of the panel. Lists to include terminal numbers, point addresses, short and long descriptors. Pressure vessels General: Mount manufacturers certificates in glazed frames on a wall next to the vessel. Valves and pumps General: Label to associate pumps with their starters and valves. Screw fix labels to body or attach label to valve handwheels with a key ring. Underground services Survey: Accurately record the routes of underground cables and pipes before backfilling. Include on the record drawings. Records: Provide digital photographic records of underground cable and pipe routes before backfilling. Include in operation and maintenance manual. Location marking: Accurately mark the location of underground cables and pipes with route markers consisting of a marker plate set flush in a concrete base, engraved to show the direction of the line and the name of the service. Markers: Place markers at ground level at each joint, route junction, change of direction, termination and building entry point and in straight runs at intervals of not more than 100 m. Marker bases: 200 mm diameter x 200 mm deep, minimum concrete. Direction marking: Show the direction of the cable and pipe run by means of direction arrows on the marker plate. Indicate distance to the next marker. Plates: Brass, aluminium or stainless steel with black filled engraved lettering, minimum size 75 x 75 x 1 mm thick. Plate fixing: Waterproof adhesive and 4 brass or stainless steel countersunk screws. Marker height: Set the marker plate flush with paved surfaces, and 25 mm above other surfaces.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 60 September 2011

Melrose specification

General requirements

Marker tape: Where electric bricks or covers are not provided over underground wiring, provide a 150 mm wide yellow or orange marker tape bearing the words WARNING electric cable buried below, laid in the trench 150 mm below ground level. Labels and notices Materials: Select from the following: - Cast metal. - For indoor applications only, engraved two-colour laminated plastic. - Proprietary pre-printed self-adhesive flexible plastic labels with machine printed black lettering. - Stainless steel or brass 1 mm thick with black filled engraved lettering. Emergency functions: To AS 1319. Colours: Generally to AS 1345 as appropriate, otherwise black lettering on white background except as follows: - Danger, warning labels: White lettering on red background. - Main switch and caution labels: Red lettering on white background. Edges: If labels exceed 1.5 mm thickness, radius or bevel the edges. Fixing: Fix labels securely using screws, rivets, proprietary self-adhesive labels or double-sided adhesive tape and as follows: - If labels are mounted in extruded aluminium sections, use rivets or countersunk screws to fix the extrusions. - Use aluminium or monel rivets for aluminium labels. Label locations: Locate labels so that they are easily seen and are either attached to, below or next to the item being marked. Labelling text and marking: To correspond to terminology and identifying number of the respective item as shown on the record drawings and documents and in operating and maintenance manuals. Lettering heights: - Danger, warning and caution notices: 10 mm for main heading, 5 mm for remainder. - Equipment labels within cabinets: 3.5 mm. - Equipment nameplates: 40 mm. - Identifying labels on outside of cabinets: 5 mm. - Isolating switches: 5 mm. - Switchboards, main assembly designation: 25 mm. - Switchboards, outgoing functional units: 8 mm. - Switchboards, sub assembly designations: 15 mm. - Valves: 20 mm. - Self-adhesive flexible plastic labels : . Labels < 2000 mm above floor: 3 mm on 6 mm wide tape. . Labels 2000 mm above floor: 8 mm on 12 mm wide tape. - Other locations: 3 mm. Operable devices: Mark to provide a ready means of identification. Include the following: - Controls. - Indicators, gauges, meters. - Isolating switches. Vapour barriers: Do not penetrate vapour barriers. 3.15 SOFTWARE General General: Provide the software required for the operation and management of building services systems and equipment.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

61

September 2011

Melrose specification

General requirements

3.16 WARRANTIES General General: If a warranty is documented or if a manufacturers standard warranty extends beyond the end of the defects liability period, name the principal as warrantee. Register with manufacturers as necessary. Retain copies delivered with components and equipment. Commencement: Commence warranty periods at practical completion or at acceptance of installation, if acceptance is not concurrent with practical completion. Approval of installer: If installation is not by manufacturer, and product warranty is conditional on the manufacturers approval of the installer, submit the manufacturers written approval of the installing firm. 3.17 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS General General: Submit operation and maintenance manuals for the whole of the work. Authors and compilers: Personnel experienced in the maintenance and operation of equipment and systems installed, and with editorial ability. Referenced documents: If referenced documents or technical worksections require that manuals be submitted, include corresponding material in the operation and maintenance manuals. Subdivision: By installation or system, depending on project size. Format electronic copies Printing: Except for drawings required in the RECORD DRAWINGS clause provide material that can be legibly printed on A4 size paper. Scope: Provide the same material as documented for hardcopy in electronic format. Quantity and format: Conform to Submissions electronic copies. Format hard copy General: A4 size loose leaf, in commercial quality, 4 ring binders with hard covers, each indexed, divided and titled. Include the following features: - Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, to spine. Identify title of project, volume number, volume subject matter, and date of issue. - Dividers: Durable divider for each separate element, with typed description of system and major equipment components. Clearly print short titles under laminated plastic tabs. - Drawings: Fold drawings to A4 size with title visible, insert in plastic sleeves (one per drawing) and accommodate them in the binders. - Pagination: Number pages. - Ring size: 50 mm maximum, with compressor bars. - Text: Manufacturers printed data, including associated diagrams, or typewritten, single-sided on bond paper, in clear concise English. Number of copies: 3. Date for submission Date for draft submission: The earlier of the following: - 2 weeks before the date for practical completion. - Commencement of training on services equipment. Date for final submission: Within 2 weeks after practical completion. 3.18 CLEANING Final cleaning General: Before practical completion, clean throughout, including all exterior and interior surfaces except those totally and permanently concealed from view. Labels: Remove all labels not required for maintenance.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

62

September 2011

Melrose specification

General requirements

3.19 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE OF SERVICES General General: During the maintenance period, carry out periodic inspections and maintenance work as recommended by manufacturers of supplied equipment, and promptly rectify faults. Emergencies: Attend emergency calls promptly. Annual maintenance: Carry out recommended annual maintenance procedures before the end of the maintenance period. Maintenance period: The greater of the defects liability period and the period nominated in the Maintenance requirements schedule. Maintenance program General: Submit details of maintenance procedures and program, relating to installed plant and equipment, 6 weeks before the date for practical completion. Indicate dates of service visits. State contact telephone numbers of service operators and describe arrangements for emergency calls. Maintenance records General: Record in binders provided with operation and maintenance manuals. Referenced documents: If referenced documents or technical worksections require that log books or records be submitted, include this material in the maintenance records. Service visits: Record comments on the functioning of the systems, work carried out, items requiring corrective action, adjustments made and name of service operator. Obtain the signature of the principals designated representative. Site control General: Report to the principals designated representative on arriving at and before leaving the site. 3.20 POST-CONSTRUCTION MANDATORY INSPECTIONS AND MAINTENANCE General General: For the duration of the defects liability period, provide inspections and maintenance of safety measures required by the following: - The Building Code of Australia. - AS 1851. - Other statutory requirements applicable to the work. Records: Provide mandatory records. Certification: Certify that mandatory inspections and maintenance have been carried out and that the respective items conform to statutory requirements. Submit certification. Annual inspection: Provide an annual inspection and maintenance immediately prior to the end of the defects liability period. 4 4.1 SELECTIONS SCHEDULES

4.2

MAINTENANCE Requirement As per manufacturers instructions

Maintenance requirements schedule Provision Maintenance period (months) All mechanical ventilation, incl. 12 months a/c and heating

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

63

September 2011

Melrose specification

Metals and prefinishes

METALS AND PREFINISHES

1 1.1

GENERAL PRECEDENCE

General Worksections and referenced documents: - The requirements of other worksections of the specification override conflicting requirements of this worksection. - The requirements of this worksection overrides conflicting requirements of its referenced documents. - The requirements of the referenced documents are minimum requirements. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS METALS

Metals Performance: Provide metals in sections of strength and stiffness suited to their required function, finish and method of fabrication. Coated steel Electrogalvanizing ferrous hollow and open sections: To AS 4750. Hot-dip galvanizing (zinc): - Ferrous open sections by an in-line process: To AS/NZS 4791. - Ferrous hollow sections by a continuous or specialised process: To AS/NZS 4792. Metallic-coated steel: - Ferrous open sections zinc coated by an in-line process: To AS/NZS 4791. - Ferrous hollow sections zinc coated by a continuous or specialised process: To AS/NZS 4792. Metallic-coated steel sheet: To AS 1397. Metal thicknesses specified are base metal thicknesses. Steel wire: To AS/NZS 4534. Stainless steel Bars: To ASTM A276. Plate, sheet and strip: To ASTM A240/A240M. Welded pipe (round): To AS 1769. Welded pipe (square): To ASTM A554. 3 3.1 EXECUTION GENERAL

Metal separation Incompatible sheet metals: Provide separation by one of the following: - Apply an anti-corrosion low moisture transmission coating such as alkyd zinc phosphate primer or aluminium pigmented bituminous paint to contact surfaces. - Insert a concealed separation layer such as polyethylene film, adhesive tape, or bituminous felt. Incompatible fixings: Do not use. Incompatible service pipes: Install lagging or grommets. Do not use absorbent, fibrous or paper products.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 64 September 2011

Melrose specification

Metals and prefinishes

Brazing General: Make sure brazed joints have sufficient lap to provide a mechanically sound joint. Butt joints: Do not use butt jointing for joints subject to loads. If butt joints are used, do not rely on the filler metal fillet only. Filler metal: To AS/NZS 1167.1. Finishing Visible joints: Finish visible joints made by welding, brazing or soldering using methods appropriate to the class of work (including grinding or buffing) before further treatment such as painting, galvanizing or electroplating. Make sure self-finished metals are without surface colour variations after jointing. Preparation General: Before applying decorative or protective prefinishes to metal components, complete welding, cutting, drilling and other fabrication, and prepare the surface using a suitable method. Standard: To AS 1627. Priming steel surfaces: If site painting is specified to otherwise uncoated mild steel or similar surfaces prime as follows: - After fabrication and before delivery to the works. - After installation, repair damaged priming and complete the coverage to unprimed surfaces. Welding Aluminium: To AS 1665. Stainless steel: To AS/NZS 1554.6. Steel: To AS/NZS 1554.1. 3.2 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES

Sample General: Provide a finish to match the sample in terms of the mill grade and finish process. Preassembly Mechanically polished and brushed finishes: Apply grit faced belts or fibre brushes that achieve unidirectional finishes with buffing as required to the following: Bead blasted finish: Provide a uniform non-directional low reflective surface by bead blasting. Do not use sand, iron or carbon steel shot. Blast both sides of austenitic grades or stainless steel to eqalise induced stress. Post assembly pre-treatment Heat discolouration: Remove by pickling. Welds: Grind excess material, brush, and polish to match the pre assembly finish. Post assembly finish Electropolish finish for external installations: Provide an electro-chemical process to stainless steel grade 316. Brushed electropolish finish: Conform to the following: - Preassembly finish: No. 4 brushed finish. - Post assembly finish: Provide an electro-chemical processed finish to achieve a No. 7 to No. 8 brushed finish. Mirror electropolish finish: - Pre assembly finish: Mill finish 2B or mirror polished finish. - Post assembly finish: Provide an electro-chemical processed finish to achieve a No. 8 mirror finish. Completion Cleaning: Clean and rinse to an acid free condition and allow to dry. Do not use carbon steel abrasives or materials containing chloride. Protection: Secure packaging or strippable plastic sheet. 3.3 ELECTROPLATING

Electroplated coatings Chromium on metals: To AS 1192. - Service condition number: At least 2. Nickel on metals: To AS 1192.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 65 September 2011

Melrose specification

Metals and prefinishes

- Service condition number: At least 2. Zinc on iron or steel: To AS 1789. 3.4 ANODISING

Sample General: Provide a finish to match the sample in terms of colour and finishing options. Anodising Standard: To AS 1231. Thickness grade: To AS 1231 Table H1. Select from the following environments from AS 1231 Table H1: - Interior: Mild, Moderate, Severe, or Very severe. - Exterior: Mild, Moderate, Tropical, Severe, or Very severe. - Repeat the description for every application. 3.5 PREPAINTING

Air-drying enamel Application: Spray or brush. Finish: Full gloss. General use: - Primer: Two-pack epoxy primer to AS/NZS 3750.13. - Top coats: 2 coats to AS 3730.6. Oil resistant use: - Primer: Two-pack epoxy primer to AS/NZS 3750.13. - Top coats: 2 coats to AS/NZS 3750.22. Equipment paint system Description: Brush or spray application using paint as follows: - Full gloss enamel finish coats, oil and petrol resistant: To AS/NZS 3750.22, two coats. - Prime coat to metal surfaces generally: To AS/NZS 3750.19 or AS/NZS 3750.20. - Prime coat to zinc-coated steel: To AS 3730.15. - Undercoat: To AS/NZS 3750.21. Prepainted metal products Standard: To AS/NZS 2728. Product type as noted in AS/NZS 2728: Not lower than the type appropriate to the field of application. Stoving enamel Application: Spray or dip. Internal use: Two-pack liquid coating Application: Spray. Finish: Full gloss. Primer: Two pack epoxy primer to AS/NZS 3750.13. Topcoat: - Internal use: Proprietary polyurethane or epoxy acrylic system. - External use: Proprietary polyurethane system. 3.6 COMPLETION

Damage General: If prefinishes are damaged, including damage caused by unauthorised site cutting or drilling, remove and replace the damaged item. Repair General: If a repair is required to metallic coated sheet or electrogalvanizing on inline galvanized steel products, clean the affected area and apply a two-pack organic primer to AS/NZS 3750.9.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

66

September 2011

Melrose specification

Termite management

TERMITE MANAGEMENT

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide termite management materials and systems. Selections: As documented. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. 1.3 STANDARD

General Termite barriers: To AS 3660.1. 1.4 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give sufficient notice to the client representative so that inspection may be made of the completed termite barriers. 1.5 TESTS

Chemical soil barriers reticulation systems Type testing: To AS 3660.1 Appendix E. 1.6 SUBMISSIONS

Tests Submit a Registered testing authority laboratory analysis certificate of chemical soil barrier type testing to Appendix E. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS NON-CHEMICAL BARRIERS

Concrete slab barrier Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 4. Termite cap and strip shields Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 5. Woven stainless steel mesh barriers Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 6. Graded stone particles barriers Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 7. 2.2 CHEMICAL SOIL BARRIERS

General Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 8. 2.3 NON-SOIL MATRIX BARRIERS

Concrete slab barrier Description: Composite membrane incorporating a termiticide. Brickwork Description: Bedding mortar incorporating a termiticide. Application: Brick bed and perpends as follows:
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 67 September 2011

Melrose specification

Termite management

- Cavity walls built off a concrete slab on ground. - Buildings with typical raft infill (footing) or formed void slab construction. - Permanent barrier in sub-floor brickwork and brick piers. Assessment criteria Standard: To AS 3660.3. 3 3.1 EXECUTION NON-CHEMICAL BARRIERS

Concrete slab barrier Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 4. Termite cap and strip shields Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 5. Woven stainless steel mesh barriers Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 6. Graded stone particles barriers Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 7. 3.2 CHEMICAL SOIL BARRIERS

General Standard: To AS 3660.1 Section 8. 3.3 COMPLETION

Termite barrier notice General: Provide a durable notice permanently fixed in a prominent location to BCA B1.4(i)(ii) or BCA 3.1.3.2(b) and AS 3660.1 Appendix A. Waste materials Progressively cleaning: Ensure that no waste materials which could attract termites remain on the site. Warranty Warranty: Provide a warranty on completion Completion inspection At the end of the defects liability period, inspect the termite control systems and submit a report on their efficacy and status. 4 4.1 SELECTIONS SCHEDULE

Termite barriers schedule Barrier designation Location Slab Slab penetrations Slab control joints and footing/slab joints Under slabs Building perimeters Under suspended floors Timber poles and posts

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

68

September 2011

Melrose specification

Demolition (interior and alterations)

DEMOLITION (INTERIOR AND ALTERATIONS)

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Carry out demolition, as documented. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. 1.3 STANDARD

General Demolition: To AS 2601. 1.4 INTERPRETATION

Definitions For the purposes of this worksection, the following definitions apply: - Demolition: The complete or partial dismantling of a building or structure, by pre-planned and controlled methods or procedures. - Dilapidation record: The photographic or video and written record made before commencement of demolition work of the condition of the portion of the existing building being retained, adjacent buildings, and other relevant structures or facilities. - Dismantle: The reduction of an item to its components in a manner to allow re-assembly. - Recover: The disconnection and removal of an item in a manner to allow re-installation. 1.5 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Services before disconnection or diversion. - Contents of building before commencement of demolition. - Site after removal of demolished materials. - Services after reconnection or diversion. 1.6 SUBMISSIONS

Authorities Evidence of compliance: Before commencing demolition, submit evidence of the following: - Requirements of authorities relating to the work under the contract have been ascertained. - A permit to demolish has been obtained from the appropriate authority. - Certification that each person having access to the construction site has completed an OHS induction training procedure which is site-specific. - Precautions necessary for protection of persons and property have been taken and suitable protective and safety devices provided to the approval of the relevant authority. - Treatment for rodent infestation has been carried out and a certificate has been obtained from the appropriate authority. - Fees and other costs have been paid. Investigation and work plan Work plan: Submit the work plan before demolition or stripping work. Include the check list items appropriate to the project from AS 2601 Appendix A, and the following information: - The method of protection and support for adjacent property. - Locations and details of necessary service deviations and terminations.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 69 September 2011

Melrose specification

Demolition (interior and alterations)

- Confirmation of the sequence of work. - Requirements of AS 2601 Section 2 Planning and execution. - If the demolition program results in components temporarily cantilevered, provide a certificate from a professional engineer. - Proposals for the safe use of mobile plant on suspended structural members including provisions for the protection of lower floors in the event of structural failure. - If implosion methods are proposed, provide a separate report of methods and safeguards. - Wheel loads of tipping or loading vehicles. Hazardous materials Audit: Prepare a Hazardous substances management plan to AS 2601 clause 1.6. Include the following: - Asbestos or material containing asbestos. - Flammable or explosive liquids or gases. - Toxic, infective or contaminated materials. - Radiation or radioactive materials. - Noxious or explosive chemicals. - Tanks or other containers which have been used for storage of explosive, toxic, infective or contaminated substances. Off site disposal Disposal location: Submit the locations and evidence of compliance with the relevant authorities for the disposal of material required to be removed from the site. Records Dilapidation record: Submit a copy of the dilapidation record for inspection. Recycling Delivery location: Submit the name and address of the proposed recycling facility. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

Demolished materials Ownership: Ownership of demolished materials is described in the Demolished materials classes table. Demolished materials classes Ownership and implementation: Comply with the Demolished materials classes table. Demolished materials classes table Class Requirement Ownership Recovered items for re-use in Recover without damage items Principal/proprietor identified in the Recovered the works items for re-use in the works schedule Contractor Demolished material for Demolish and deliver for recycling off site recycling material identified in the Demolished material for recycling off-site schedule Demolished for removal Remove from the site Contractor demolished materials identified in the Demolish for removal schedule. Do not burn or bury on site Transit: Prevent spillage of demolishing materials in transit

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

70

September 2011

Melrose specification

Demolition (interior and alterations)

3 3.1

EXECUTION SUPPORT

Temporary support General: If temporary support is required, certification for its design and installation is required from a professional engineer engaged by the contractor. Existing buildings: Until permanent support is provided, provide temporary support for sections of existing buildings which are to be altered and which normally rely for support on work to be demolished. 3.2 PROTECTION

Heritage fabric The contractor is to make the workmen and sub-contractors aware that these buildings are old and fragile. Care is to be exercised throughout the contract to subject the fabric to as little shock as is practical. All demolitions are to be carried out within this context. All damage sustained to the building during the demolition work is to be rectified by the contractor to the Architect's approval at no variation to contract sum. All demolition and preparation of existing work for alterations is to be carried out in a careful and systematic manner. Demolish or preserve surfaces, hardware and services as scheduled. Chimney pots and cages When removing roof fabric care shall be taken not to dislodge chimney pots & cages. The contractor shall replace any section of chimney dislodged due to demolitions at no variation to the contract sum. Staircases, thresholds and joinery Protect existing staircases from damage during the progress of the works. Provide temporary hardboard covering to treads and thresholds and joinery to ensure no damage. The Contractor is to make good any damage to the direction of the Architect at no variation to the contract sum. Encroachment General: Prevent the encroachment of demolished materials onto adjoining property, including public places. Dust protection General: Provide dust-proof screens, bulkheads and covers to protect existing finishes and the immediate environment from dust and debris. Security General: If a wall or roof is opened for alterations and additions, provide security against unauthorised entry to the building. Temporary screens General: Fill the whole of designated temporary openings or other spaces using dustproof and weatherproof temporary screens, fixed securely to the existing structure, and install to ensure appropriate shedding of water to avoid damage to retained existing elements or adjacent structures and contents. Type: Timber framed screens sheeted with fibre cement and painted. Seal the junctions between the screens and the openings. Temporary access General: If required, provide a substantial temporary doorset fitted with a rim deadlock, and remove on completion of demolition. 3.3 DEMOLITION BUILDING WORKS

Dilapidation record Purpose: Use the dilapidation record to assess the damage and making good arising out of demolition work. Availability: Keep the records of the investigations on site and available for inspection until the date of practical completion of the contract.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 71 September 2011

Melrose specification

Demolition (interior and alterations)

Concrete slabs General: Using a diamond saw, neatly cut back or trim to new alignment with a clean true face existing concrete slabs to be partially demolished or penetrated. Explosives General: Do not use explosives. 3.4 DEMOLITION BUILDING SERVICES

General General: Decommission, isolate, demolish and remove from the site all existing redundant equipment including associated components that become redundant as a result of the demolition. Breaking down: Disassemble or cut up equipment where necessary to allow removal. Recovered materials: Recover all components associated with the listed items. Minimise damage during removal and deliver to the locations scheduled. Refrigeration systems General: Undertake demolition work on refrigeration systems in conformance with: - AS/NZS 1677.2 Appendix F. - The recommendations of SAA HB 40.1 and SAA HB 40.2. Re-used components General: Clean re-used components and test for compliance with current Australian Standards before returning to service. Provide results of compliance tests. 3.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

Identified hazardous materials Register: Hazardous materials have been identified as present on site and a Hazardous materials register (Hazardous materials building survey) has been prepared. Availability: Included with tender and contract document General: Carry out removal as of hazardous materials as documented. Hazardous materials removal Standard: To AS 2601 clause 1.6.2. Procedure for asbestos removal: As per authority requirements 3.6 COMPLETION

Notice of completion General: Give at least 7 working days notice of completion of demolition so that adjacent structures may be inspected following completion of demolition. Making good: Make good any damage arising out of demolition work. Obtain written acceptance from the owner of each adjoining property of completeness and standard of making good. Temporary support General: Clear away at completion of demolition. 4 4.1 SELECTIONS DEMOLITION

Recovered items for re-use in the works schedule Item Location for re-use Refer to the waste minimisation plan Demolished material for recycling off-site schedule Material Refer to the waste minimisation plan Demolish for removal schedule Item Refer to the waste minimisation plan

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

72

September 2011

Melrose specification

Concrete reinforcement

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide concrete reinforcement and include the following: - Supply. - Fixing in place. - Maintain position during concreting. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. - Concrete in situ. 1.3 STANDARDS

General Standard: To AS 3600. 1.4 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Cores and embedments fixed in place. - Reinforcement fixed in place, with formwork completed. 1.5 SUBMISSIONS

Execution proposals Changes: If changes are proposed to reinforcement shown on the drawings, submit details. Damaged galvanizing: If repair is required, submit proposals to AS/NZS 4680 Section 8. Provision for concrete placement: If spacing or cover of reinforcement does not comply with AS 3600. Splicing: If splicing not documented is proposed, submit details. Welding: Give notice before welding reinforcement. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS

Protective coating General: For concrete elements containing protective coated reinforcement, provide the same coating type to all that elements reinforcement and embedded ferrous metal items, including tie wires, stools, spacers, stirrups, plates and ferrules, and protect other embedded metals with a suitable coating. Epoxy coating: High build, high solids chemically resistant coating. - Thickness: 200 m minimum. Galvanizing: To AS/NZS 4680: - Sequence: If fabrication is to occur after galvanizing, submit proposals for galvanizing repair and coating of cut ends. - Zinc-coating (minimum): 600 g/m2. Steel reinforcement Standard: To AS/NZS 4671.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

73

September 2011

Melrose specification

Concrete reinforcement

Surface condition: Free of loose mill scale, rust, oil, grease, mud or other material which would reduce the bond between the reinforcement and concrete. Tie wire General: Annealed steel 1.25 mm diameter (minimum). External and corrosive applications: Galvanized. 3 3.1 EXECUTION CONSTRUCTION

Dowels Fixing: If a dowel has an unpainted half, embed this in the concrete placed first. Tolerances: - Alignment: 2 mm in 300 mm. - Location: half the diameter of the dowel. Grade: 250 N. Supports General: Provide proprietary concrete, metal or plastic supports to reinforcement in the form of chairs, spacers, stools, hangers and ties, as follows: - Adequate to withstand construction and traffic loads. - With a protective coating if they are ferrous metal extending to the surface of the concrete, or are used with galvanized or zinc-coated reinforcement. Minimum spacing: - Bars: 60 diameters. - Mesh: 800 mm. Supports over membranes: Prevent damage to waterproofing membranes or vapour barriers. If appropriate place a metal or plastic plate under each support. Projecting reinforcement General: If starter or other bars project beyond reinforcement mats or cages, through formwork or from cast concrete, provide a plastic protective cap to each bar until it is incorporated into subsequent work. Tying General: Secure the reinforcement against displacement by tying at intersections with either wire ties, or clips. Bend the ends of wire ties away from nearby faces of forms so that the ties do not project into the concrete cover. Beams: Tie stirrups to bars in each corner of each stirrup. Fix other longitudinal bars to stirrups at 1 m maximum intervals. Cleaning General: Remove all debris from the formed space. Welding General: If welding of reinforcement is proposed, provide details. 3.2 COMPLETION

Unencased reinforcement General: If starter bars and other items project from cast concrete for future additions and are exposed to the weather, provide details of protection.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

74

September 2011

Melrose specification

Light timber framing

LIGHT TIMBER FRAMING

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide light timber floor, wall and roof framing. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. - Adhesives, sealants and fasteners. - Timber products, finishes and treatment. 1.3 STANDARDS

General Framing: To AS 1684.2, AS 1684.3 or AS 1684.4, as appropriate. Design: To AS 1720.1. 1.4 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Prefabricated units before installation. - Fabricated items before priming or water-repellent treatment. - Bolts after final tightening. - Timber work after erection but before it is covered. 1.5 SUBMISSIONS

Subcontractors Prefabricated items: Submit the name and contact details of the proposed manufacturer. Certification Local legislation or regulations may require non-prefabricated timber framing to be certified by a professional engineer. Amend to suit by adding certification requirements. General: Submit certification by a professional engineer of the design, documentation and erected work to AS 1684 and AS 1720.1. Include the following: - Reactions: Provide location and magnitude of reactions to be accommodated by the support structure. - Floor and wall and roof frame member sizes: A schedule of proposed member sizes, certified as meeting stated project, AS 1684 and AS 1720.1 requirements for span, spacings, loadings and deflections. - Species and stress grade. - Moisture content at time of manufacture. - Preservative treatment, if any. Shop drawings General: Submit shop detail drawings certified by a professional engineer stating that the design has been carried out to AS 1684 and AS 1720.1 requirements for the configurations and loadings. Include the following: - Prefabricated roof trusses: . Marking plans. . Truss plan layout. . Elevations, with the arrangement of members allowing for the accommodation of in-roof services and the size and section type of each member.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 75 September 2011

Melrose specification

Light timber framing

. Camber of all elements. . The method of assembly, connection, lifting, holding down and bracing. - Prefabricated wall frames: . Wall plan, showing all wall layouts. . Elevations showing the arrangement of members, and the size and section type of each member. . The method of assembly, connection, lifting, holding down and bracing. Materials Identification: - Certification: Submit a suppliers certificate (which may be included on an invoice or delivery docket) verifying that the timber complies with the specification, including moisture content. - Inspection: Submit the inspection authoritys certificate verifying that the timber complies with the specification. Moisture content: Submit records of moisture content. Preservative treatment Certificate: Submit a test certificate from an independent testing authority confirming that the required preservative retention has been achieved. CCA treated timber: If proposed, provide details of treatment. CCA treated timber: Do not use. 1.6 TOLERANCES

General Walls: Conform to the Walls tolerances table. Walls tolerances table Property Permitted deviation (mm) Generally: Verticality in 2000 mm 4 Generally: Flatness1 in 2000 mm 3 2 Features : Verticality in 2000 mm 2 Features: Horizontality in 2000 mm 2 1. Flatness: Measured under a straightedge laid in any direction on a plane surface. 2. Features: Conspicuous horizontal or vertical lines including external corners, parapets, reveals, heads, sills.

2 2.1

PRODUCTS TIMBER

Identification Method: Identify timber using branding, certification or both. Branding: Brand structural timber, under the authority of a recognised product certification program applicable to the product. Locate the brand mark on faces or edges which will be concealed in the works. Include the following data for timbers not covered by branding provisions Australian standards or regulations for which branding is required. - Stress grade. - Method of grading. - Seasoned or s. - The certification mark of the product certification program. - The applicable standard. Certification: Forest certification, chain of custody and product labelling to the Timber products, finishes and treatment worksection. Fascias and barge boards Hardwood: To AS 2796.1. Seasoned cypress pine: To AS 1810. Softwood: To AS 4785.1.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 76 September 2011

Melrose specification

Light timber framing

Preservation treatment: To the Timber products, finishes and treatment worksection. 2.2 LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER AND GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER

Laminated veneer lumber Standard: To AS/NZS 4357.0. Glued laminated timber Standard: To AS/NZS 1328.1. 2.3 SHEET PRODUCTS

Structural plywood Standard: To AS/NZS 2269.0. Bond: Type A to AS/NZS 2754.1 (Int). Veneer Veneer quality to visible surfaces: CD (minimum) to AS/NZS 2269.0. Identification Branding: To AS/NZS 2269.0. Brand mark: Locate the brand mark on faces or edges which will be clearly visible for certification inspections and concealed in the works. 2.4 COMPONENTS

Nail plated joined beams Standard: To AS 4446. Type: Proprietary composite member made up by butt and horizontally joining timber with pressed in nail plates. Mild steel post bases Minimum dimensions: - Conform to AS 1684.2 Table 9.20(p) and AS 1684.3 Table 9.20(p), as appropriate. Location: To timber posts supported off concrete slabs or footings. Finish: Galvanize after fabrication. Fasteners General: Conform to the Adhesives, sealants and fasteners worksection. Installation: Do not split or otherwise damage the timber. Coating: Before placing bolts in contact with CCA treated timber, coat the shank of the bolt in a grease or bituminous coating. Damp-proof course Material: To AS/NZS 2904. - Generally: Install DPC to existing brick building and new works Flashings Material: To AS/NZS 2904. 2.5 FINGER JOINTED STRUCTURAL TIMBER

General Standard: To AS 5068. 2.6 RECONSTITUTED STRUCTURAL TIMBER PRODUCTS

Wet-processed fibreboard (including hardboard) Standard: To AS/NZS 1859.4. 3 3.1 EXECUTION TRANSPORT AND DELIVERY

General Handling and protection: Do not distort or damage timber or timber products. Moisture content: Maintain the equilibrium moisture content of seasoned timber.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

77

September 2011

Melrose specification

Light timber framing

Protection from weather General: Provide temporary protection for members until permanent covering is in place. 3.2 FLOOR FRAMING

Bearers and joists Levelling: Level bearers and joists by checking or by packing for the full width of the member with dense corrosion resistant material which is secured in place: - Maximum thickness of packing: 3 mm. Spring: Lay bearers and joists to allow for straightening under loading. Joints: Locate joints only over supports: - Minimum bearing of bearers: 50 mm. - Minimum bearing of joists: 30 mm. Fixing: Secure bearers and joists to supports to provide restraint against lateral movement. Joist restraint: - Unseasoned timber: If joist timber is unseasoned, the span 3000 mm, and there is no ceiling lining, provide solid blocking between each joist in rows at 1800 mm centres. - Deep joists: If the joist depth:width ratio is 4, restrain joists at the ends of the joists over supports and at 1800 mm centres using either of following as appropriate: . Continuous trimming joists. . Solid blocking or herringbone strutting. - Trimmers or blocking dimensions: . Depth: Joist depth less 25 mm. . Width: 25 mm. - Herringbone strutting dimensions: 38 x 38 mm. Tolerance Floors: 5 mm maximum deviation in 3 m measured under a straight edge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction. 3.3 WALL FRAMING

Additional support General: Provide additional support in the form of noggings, trimmers and studs for fixing lining, cladding, hardware, accessories, fixtures and fittings as required. Maximum spacing of noggings: 1350 mm centres. Vermin barriers General: Provide vermin barriers as follows: - Brick veneer barrier: Close nail 10 mm galvanized steel wire mesh to the underside of the bottom plate of external stud walls, extending across the cavity for building into brickwork. Stud wall barrier: Metallic coated steel sheet, 600 mm wide x 0.6 mm thick, fixed to each side of the external stud wall frame at the base. Lap joints 25 mm. Damp-proof course General: Provide damp-proof courses under the bottom plate of stud walls built off slabs or masonry dwarf walls, as follows to AS/NZS 4200.1: - External walls (not masonry veneer): Turn up at least 75 mm on the inside and tack. Project 10 mm beyond the external slab edge or dwarf wall and turn down at 45. - Walls of bathrooms, shower rooms and laundries: Turn up at least 150 mm on the wet side and tack to studs. Installation: Lay in long lengths. Lap full width at angles and intersections and at least 150 mm at joints. Junctions: Preserve continuity of damp-proofing at junctions of damp-proof courses, sarkings and waterproof membranes. Flashings Location: Provide flashings to external openings to prevent the entry of moisture. Form trays at the ends of sill flashings. Masonry veneer construction: Extend across cavities and build into brickwork.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 78 September 2011

Melrose specification

Light timber framing

3.4

ROOF AND CEILING FRAMING

Wall plates Fixing: Fix timber wall plates to masonry, with straps, bolts or both. Nailing plates General: Where timber joists, rafters or purlins bear on or into steel members, provide nailing plates to transfer the design loads, bolted to the steel member at 500 mm maximum centres and 100 mm maximum from the end of the nailing plate. Nailing plates General: Where timber joists, rafters or purlins bear on or into steel members, provide 50 mm thick nailing plates bolted to the steel member at 500 mm maximum centres. Beam framing Ridge straps: Butt ends of rafters together at ridge, and strap each pair together with 900 mm long steel strap passing over the ridge, triple nailed to each rafter. Roof space: If a water container or heater is located in the roof space, provide a support platform to AS/NZS 3500.4 clause 5.5. Additional support: Provide a frame member behind every joint in fibre cement sheeting or lining. Anti-ponding boards Standard: To AS/NZS 4200.2. 3.5 TRUSSES

Fabrication Camber: Camber bottom chord upward. Overhangs: Free from spring or splits. Marking General: Permanently mark each truss to show: - Project identification. - Manufacturer. - Tag or number. - Location. - Support points Installation Nail plated prefabricated roof trusses: AS 4440. Support: Support trusses on bottom chord at two points only, unless designed for additional support. Plumb: Within H/200, where H is the height. Vertical movement: Over internal non-load bearing walls, provide minimum vertical clearance of 10 mm plus ceiling batten depth, if any. Use bracing methods which allow for the design vertical movements. 3.6 COMPLETION

Tightening General: Tighten bolts, screws and other fixings so that joints and anchorages are secure at the date of practical completion.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

79

September 2011

Melrose specification

Roofing combined

ROOFING COMBINED

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide a roofing system and associated work which: - Satisfies the product performance requirements. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. 1.3 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

Ambient climatic conditions Design rainfall intensity (mm/h) to AS/NZS 3500.3: As rainfall data for site 1.4 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of: - Roof supports. - Those parts of the roofing, sarking, vapour barrier, insulation and roof plumbing installation which will be covered up or concealed. 1.5 SUBMISSIONS

Tests Submit results of type tests as follows: - Metal roofing general tests: Roof sheeting and fastenings to AS 1562.1 for resistance to concentrated load and to wind pressure. - Metal roofing in cyclonic regions AS/NZS 1170.2: Roof sheeting and fastenings to AS 1562.1 clause 5.6. - Fibre cement roofing: Type test the roof sheeting and fixings to AS/NZS 1562.2 for resistance to wind forces. Internal downpipes: Submit results of site tests to each stack hydrostatically in stages 2 storeys high for two hours. Remedy defects and retest if necessary. Samples Submit samples of the following showing the range of variation available: - Sheet metal finishes showing the range of variation available. - Custom profiled flashings and cappings. - Tiles. - Slates. - Bedding and pointing mortar. - Shingles or shakes. - Pre weathered finish to sheet metal. Installation Seamed roofing: Submit evidence of experience with non-ferrous roof installation. Shop drawings General: Submit shop drawings to a scale that best describes the detail and showing all relevant details

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

80

September 2011

Melrose specification

Roofing combined

2 2.1

PRODUCTS COMPONENTS

Fasteners Finish: Prefinish exposed fasteners with an oven baked polymer coating to match the roofing material. Fastenings to timber battens: Provide fastenings just long enough to penetrate the thickness of the batten without piercing the underside. Profiled fillers Provide: Purpose-made closed cell polyethylene foam profiled to match the roofing profile. Locate profiled fillers under flashings to: - Ridges. - Eaves. - Lapped joints in roof sheeting. Safety mesh Standard: To AS/NZS 4389. 2.2 SHEET METAL ROOFING

General Refer to conservation specification for sheet metal roofing to existing and new roofs Standards Design and installation: To AS 1562.1. Prepainted and organic film/metal laminate products: To AS/NZS 2728. 2.3 SHEET METAL TILING

General Type: A proprietary roofing system of interlocking prefinished steel sheets profiled to resemble tiles. Accessories: Provide the accessories, compatible with the tiles, necessary to complete the tiling. 2.4 SEAMED SHEET METAL ROOFING

Type Description: Seamed sheet metal roofing laid on flush finished continuous plywood decking over an underlayer and separation layer. Plywood decking Grading: DD to AS/NZS 2269.0, Bond Type A. Thickness: 19 mm. Underlayer Description: Self-adhesive, rubberized asphalt/polyethylene waterproofing membrane. Separation layer Description: Fire-resisting mat of a nylon core of fused entangled filaments. Roof sheeting Material: Zinc Profile: Roll form sheeting into pan profiles for forming into seamed joints. Width between seams: As per drawings Accessories Solder: 40% tin, 60% lead soft solder. Flux: Z-04-S. Sealant: 100% natural cure non-acid based silicone rubber to match roofing. Fixings: Provide starter clips, fixing clips and fastenings as recommended by the roofing system supplier.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

81

September 2011

Melrose specification

Roofing combined

2.5

ROOF PLUMBING

General Standard: To AS/NZS 3500.3. General: Provide the flashings, cappings, gutters, rainwater heads, outlets and downpipes necessary to complete the roof system. Materials Metal rainwater goods: To AS/NZS 2179.1. PVC rainwater goods and accessories: To AS/NZS 3500.3. Proprietary flashings and cappings Standard: To AS/NZS 2904. Material and colour: Match roof sheeting. Rib notching: Match roof sheeting. Proprietary ridge and barge cappings Material and colour: Match roof sheeting. Eaves gutters Material and colour: Match roof sheeting. Matching fascia/barge: If the selected eaves gutter is a proprietary high front pattern forming part of a combined system of gutter, fascia and barge, provide the matching proprietary fascias and barge cappings to roof verges and edges. Valley gutters Replace size TME to existing structure in material to match new roof sheeting Downpipes As per drawings Vents As per drawings Leaf screens Provide over all gutters 2.6 GLAZED ROOFING

Description General: Provide sloped overhead glazing fixed to glazing bars or directly to the roof framing. Provide the necessary trim, flashings and sealants. Glass selection and installation: To AS 1288. Material: As per drawings Type: As per drawings Thickness (mm): As per drawings Certification: Required. Certification provider: An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand (JAS-ANZ). Surface film: As per drawings Supports: As per drawings Solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC): As per drawings U-value: As per drawings Colour: As per drawings Fire performance: As per drawings

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

82

September 2011

Melrose specification

Roofing combined

3 3.1

EXECUTION INSTALLATION

Protection General: Keep the roofing and rainwater system free of debris and loose material during construction, and leave them clean and unobstructed on completion. Repair damage to the roofing and rainwater system. Touch up: If it is necessary to touch up minor damage to prepainted metal roofing, do not overspray onto undamaged surfaces. Thermal movement Requirement: Provide for thermal movement in the roof installation and the structure, including movement in joints and fastenings. Pan type sheets Removal: Capable of being de-indexed and removed without damage. Curved corrugated sheet General: Form by rolling from material recommended for curving or bullnosing. Minimise crimping or creasing across the face of the sheet. Trim off crimped or creased edges and ends. Metal separation Requirement: Prevent direct contact between incompatible metals, and between green hardwood or chemically treated timber and aluminium or coated steel, by either: - Applying an anti-corrosion, low moisture transmission coating to contact surfaces. - Inserting a separation layer. Tolerances Requirement: Conform to the Tolerances table. Tolerances table Property Tolerance criteria: Permitted deviation (mm) Spacing of supporting members 5 mm on the nominated support member spacing Vertical or horizontal misalignment at the abutting 2 mm ends of sheets Tops of supporting members in a plane parallel to 7 mm smooth deviation per metre length of the nominated roof slope supporting member 3.2 SHEET METAL ROOFING

Roof sheet installation Eaves: Treat ends of sheets as follows: - Generally: Close off ribs at tops and bottoms of sheets by mechanical means or with purpose-made fillers or end caps. - At gutters: Project sheets 50 mm into gutters. Swarf: Remove swarf and other debris as soon as it is deposited. Accessories: Provide material with the same finish as roofing sheets. Expansion joints: As per manufacturers specification 3.3 BUILDING ELEMENTS

Ridges and eaves Treat ends of sheets as follows: - Project sheets 50 mm into gutters. - Close off ribs at bottom of sheets using mechanical means or with purpose-made fillers or end caps. - Turn pans of sheets up at tops and down into gutters by mechanical means. - Provide pre-cut notched eaves flashing and bird proofing where necessary. - Close off ridges with purpose-made ridge fillers of closed cell polyethylene. Ridge and barge Capping: Finish off along ridge and verge lines with purpose-made ridge capping or barge rolls.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 83 September 2011

Melrose specification

Roofing combined

Sprung curved ridge General: Lay the roofing sheets in single lengths from eaves to eaves by naturally curving the sheets over the ridge. Ridge: Seal side laps at the ridge and extend the sealant to the point where the roof pitch equals the recommended pitch of the roofing profile. End laps General: Where end laps are unavoidable, and the sheet profile is not suitable for interlocking or contact end laps, construct a stepped type lap. 3.4 SEAMED SHEET METAL ROOFING

Plywood decking Installation: Lay the length of the sheets at right angles to the supports. Stagger the end joints and locate them centrally over framing members. If panels are not tongue and grooved provide noggings or trimmer joists to support the edges. Fixing, 300 mm centres to each support: - Timber: Adhesive and nail. - Steel: Metal coated self drilling/tapping screws with the heads finishing below the surface. Control joints: 12 mm gap at abutting building elements. Fabrication Off site: Basic trays. Minimum bending radius: 1.75 mm. Fixing Method: Fix pans to the deck with concealed clips at 250 mm maximum centres. Seams Roof pitch < 25: Double standing seam. Walls and roof pitches > 25: Roll cap seam. Method: Mechanically form and welt seal in situ using a self propelled seaming machine, to stand 25 mm high on completion. Dress seams flat at gutters, ridges and hips, and fold both pan and seam down into gutters and up to form stop ends at ridges and hips. Ridge and hip capping Installation: Lock welt to the upturn of the roofing. 3.5 ROOF PLUMBING

Jointing sheet metal rainwater goods Butt joints: Make joints over a backing strip of the same material. Soldered joints: Do not solder aluminium or aluminium/zinc-coated steel. Sealing: Seal fasteners and mechanically fastened joints. Fill the holes of blind rivets with silicone sealant. Flashings Installation: Flash roof junctions, upstands, abutments and projections through the roof. Preform to required shapes where possible. Notch, scribe, flute or dress down as necessary to follow the profile of adjacent surfaces. Mitre angles and lap joints 150 mm in running lengths. Provide matching expansion joints at 6 m maximum intervals. Upstands: Flash projections above or through the roof with two part flashings, consisting of a base flashing and a cover flashing, with at least 100 mm vertical overlap. Provide for independent movement between the roof and the projection. Large penetrations: To low pitch roofs extend the base flashing over the roofing ribs to the ridge to prevent ponding behind the penetrating element. Wall abutments: Provide overflashings where roofs abut walls, stepped to the roof slope in masonry and planked cladding, otherwise raking and as follows: - In masonry: Build into the full width of the outer leaf. Turn up within cavity, sloping inward across the cavity and fixed to or built in to the inner leaf at least 75 mm above. - In concrete: Turn 25 mm into joints or grooves, wedge at 200 mm centres with compatible material and point up.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

84

September 2011

Melrose specification

Roofing combined

Fixing to masonry or concrete: Step in courses to the roof slope. Interleave with damp proof course, if any. Fixing to pipes: Solder, or seal with neutral cured silicone rubber and either of the following: - Secure with a clamping ring. - Provide a proprietary flexible clamping shoe with attached metal surround flashing. Gutters General: Prefabricate box gutters. Form stop ends, downpipe nozzles, bends and returns. Dress downpipe nozzles into outlets. Provide overflows to prevent back-flooding. Gutter and sump support: Provide framing and lining to support valley gutters, box gutters and sumps. Line the whole area under the gutters and sumps. Valley gutters: Profile to suit the valley boarding. Turn back both edges 180 x 6 mm radius. Nail or screw to the valley boarding at the top end to prevent the gutter creeping downwards. Expansion joints: Provide expansion joints in guttering longer than 30 m: Downpipes General: Prefabricate downpipes to the required section and shape where possible. Connect heads to gutter outlets and, if applicable, connect feet to rainwater drains. Access cover: Provide a removable watertight access cover at the foot of each downpipe stack. Downpipe support: Provide supports and fixings for downpipes. Rainwater disposal System: As per hydraulic engineers drawings 3.6 GLAZED ROOFING

Installation As per manufacturers instructions Warranties Roofing materials: Submit the manufacturers published product warranties. Maintenance manual On completion: Submit a manual of recommendations from the roof manufacturer or supplier for the maintenance of the roofing system including, frequency of inspection and recommended methods of access, inspection, cleaning, repair and replacement. Spare tiles Number: Provide one spare matching tile for every hundred tiles on the roof. Provide spare accessories in the same ratio. Location: Stack spares within the roof space. Designated locations: On or next to lines of supporting walls.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

85

September 2011

Melrose specification

Cladding combined

CLADDING COMBINED

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide lightweight external wall cladding and associated work which is as follows: - Satisfies the product performance requirements. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. 1.3 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give sufficient notice to the client representative so that the framing, sarking, vapour barrier and insulation may be inspected before they are covered up or concealed. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS SHEET METAL CLADDING

Standards Design and installation: To AS 1562.1. Prepainted and organic film/metal laminate products: To AS/NZS 2728. 2.2 TIMBER WEATHERBOARDS

Timber Hardwood: To AS 2796.1. - Grade to AS 2796.2: Seasoned cypress pine: To AS 1810. Softwood: To AS 4785.1. 2.3 FIBRE CEMENT CLADDING

Fibre cement Standard: To AS/NZS 2908.2. Cladding, eaves and soffit linings: Type A Category 3 (modulus of rupture 7 MPa). Compressed cladding: Type A Category 5 (modulus of rupture 18 MPa). - Edges: Square. Sheet cladding General: Provide a proprietary system of single faced fibre cement sheets. Arrangement: Set out in even panels with joints coinciding with framing. Sheet thickness: 6 mm. Joints, corners and edges: UPVC extrusion. Eaves and soffit lining Sheets: Single faced fibre cement. Sheet thickness: 4.5 mm. Joints: UPVC extrusion. 2.4 COMPONENTS

Flashings Standard: To AS/NZS 2904.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

86

September 2011

Melrose specification

Cladding combined

3 3.1

EXECUTION TOLERANCES

Tolerances Requirement: Conform to the Tolerances table. Tolerances table Property Spacing of supporting members Vertical or horizontal misalignment at the abutting ends of cladding 3.2 CONSTRUCTION GENERALLY

Tolerance criteria: Permitted deviation ( mm) 5 mm on the nominated support member spacing 2 mm

Substrates or framing Requirement: Before fixing cladding check and, if necessary, adjust the alignment of substrates or framing. Fixing Method: Nail to timber framing, screw to steel framing. Accessories and trim Provide accessories and trim necessary to complete the installation. Fixing eaves and soffit lining Nailing: 150 mm centres to bearers at maximum 450 mm centres. Metal separation Requirement: Prevent direct contact between incompatible metals, and between green hardwood or chemically treated timber and aluminium or coated steel, by either: - Applying an anti-corrosion, low moisture transmission coating to contact surfaces. - Inserting a separation layer. 3.3 PROPRIETARY SYSTEMS OR PRODUCTS

Fixing Product fixing: Fix the following proprietary systems in accordance with the current written recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer or supplier: - Hardboard plank cladding. - Fibre cement plank cladding. - Composite sandwich panels. - Fibre cement cladding. - Compressed fibre cement cladding. - Complete cladding systems. - Aluminium sandwich panel cladding systems. - EIFS cladding systems. 3.4 SHEET METAL CLADDING

Cladding sheet installation Swarf: Remove swarf and other debris as soon as it is deposited. Accessories: Provide material with the same finish as cladding sheets. Expansion joints: as per manufacturers specification Corner flashing Requirement: Finish off at corners with purpose-made folded flashing strips. 3.5 TIMBER WEATHERBOARD CLADDING

Preparation Preservative treatment: For cladding with a natural or stained finish, pre-finish the boards by dipping or brushing with water repellent preservative. Do not apply preservative if this is incompatible with a specified pigmented stain finish.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 87 September 2011

Melrose specification

Cladding combined

Cut surfaces: Treat freshly cut surfaces with water repellent before fixing. Installation Single lengths: Provide single lengths when installed vertically. Whenever possible provide single lengths of boards when installed horizontally. Fixing at crossings: - Seasoned milled weatherboards: 2 fixings. - Unseasoned hardwood, sawn weatherboards, or secret nailed profiles: 1 fixing. Nails: - Hot dip galvanized to non-corrosive timbers. - Silica bronze or stainless steel to corrosive timbers (including western red cedar or redwood). Nailheads: Treat visible nailheads as follows: - In stained or clear finishes: Drive flush. - In opaque finishes: Punch below the surface and fill flush with putty after the surface has been primed. Joints Overlapping joints: Lap boards at least 30 mm. End grain joints: Install boards so that butt joints are in compression. Internal and external corners: Butt against a stop bead of thickness at least that of the cladding. 3.6 COMPLETION

Warranties Roofing materials: Submit the manufacturer's published product warranties.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

88

September 2011

Melrose specification

Windows and glazed doors

WINDOWS AND GLAZED DOORS

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Conform to the Selections. Maintenance Product design: Provide windows with sashes capable of being opened to satisfy the documented maintenance requirements. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. - Refer to the Breezway louvers worksection Manufacturers documents Manufacturers and suppliers documents related to this worksection are: [complete/delete] 1.3 STANDARDS

General Selection and installation: To AS 2047. Glazing Glass type and thickness: To AS 1288, where no glass type or thickness is nominated. Materials and installation: To AS 1288. Quality requirements for cut-to-size and processed glass: To AS/NZS 4667. Terminology for work on glass: To AS/NZS 4668. 1.4 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Openings prepared to receive windows (where windows are to be installed in prepared openings). - Fabricated window assemblies at the factory ready for delivery to the site. - Fabricated window assemblies delivered to the site, before installation. - Commencement of window installation. 1.5 SUBMISSIONS

Samples Submit samples of window and door framing as follows: - Accessory and hardware items documented descriptively or by performance (i.e. not documented as proprietary items) including locks, latches, handles, catches, sash operators, anchor brackets and attachments, masonry anchors and weather seals (pile or extruded). - Colour samples of prefinished production material (e.g. anodised or organic coated extrusions and sheet) showing the limits of the range of variation in the selected colour. - Joints made by proposed techniques. - Sections proposed to be used for frames, sashes, louvres and slats. - Label each sample, giving the Series code reference and date of manufacture. Submit samples of glazing materials, each at least 200 x 200 mm, showing documented visual properties and the range of variation, if any, for each of the following types of glass or glazing plastics: - Tinted or coloured glass or glazing plastics. - Surface modified or surface coated glass. - Patterned or obscured glass or glazing plastics.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 89 September 2011

Melrose specification

Windows and glazed doors

- Ceramic coated glass. - Wired glass. - Mirror glass. Shop drawings Submit shop drawings showing the following information: - Full size sections of members. - Hardware, fittings and accessories including fixing details. - Junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces. - Layout (sectional plan and elevation) of the window assembly. - Lubrication requirements. - Methods of assembly. - Methods of installation, including fixing, caulking and flashing. - Provision for vertical and horizontal expansion. - Method of glazing, including the following: . Rebate depth. . Edge restraint. . Clearances and tolerances. . Glazing gaskets and sealant beads. Certification: Submit an engineers certificate confirming compliance with AS 2047. Subcontractors General: Submit names and contact details of proposed manufacturers and installers. Have windows and glazed doors installed by their manufacturer or by a subcontractor recommended by the manufacturer. Type-test reports General: Submit type-test reports verifying conformance to AS 2047 and the Window and glazed door performance schedule as follows: - Fire resistance level: To AS 1530.4. - Weighted sound reduction index: To AS/NZS 1276.1, ISO 717-1 or AS/NZS ISO 717.1. Opacified glass General: Submit a statement by the manufacturer certifying that the proposed method of opacifying the glass will not be detrimental to the glass or detract in any way from the glass product warranty. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS GENERAL

Standards Flashings: To AS/NZS 2904. Aluminium extrusions: To AS/NZS 1866. 2.2 GLASS

Glass types and quality Standard: To AS/NZS 4667. Glazing plastics General: Free from surface abrasions, and warranted by the manufacturer for 10 years against yellowing or other colour change, loss of strength and impact resistance, and general deterioration. Safety glasses Standard: To AS/NZS 2208. Certification: Required. Certification provider: An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand (JAS-ANZ). Type: Grade A when used in curtain walls.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

90

September 2011

Melrose specification

Windows and glazed doors

Heat soaking Requirement: All toughened glass products. Ceramic coated glass Description: Heat strengthened or toughened glass with a coloured ceramic coating fused to and made an integral part of the surface: To ASTM C1048, Condition B. Opacified glass Description: Glass with an opacifier permanently bonded to the inner face. Unacceptable blemishes in heat-treated flat glass (including tinted and coated glass) Standard: To AS/NZS 4667. Insulating glass units (IGUs) Selection and installation: To AS/NZS 4666. 2.3 GLAZING MATERIALS

General Glazing materials (including putty, glazing compounds, sealants, gaskets, glazing tapes, spacing strips, spacing tapes, spacers, setting blocks and compression wedges): Appropriate for the conditions of application and the required performance. Jointing materials Requirement: Provide recommended jointing and pointing materials which are compatible with each other and with the contact surfaces and non staining to finished surfaces. Do not provide bituminous materials on absorbent surfaces. Priming Application: Apply the recommended primer to the surfaces in contact with sealant materials. Control joints Depth of elastomeric sealant: One half the joint width, or 6 mm, whichever is the greater. Foamed materials (in compressible fillers and backing rods): Closed-cell or impregnated types which do not absorb water. Bond breaking: Provide backing rods, and other back-up materials for sealants, which do not adhere to the sealant. 2.4 GLASS IDENTIFICATION

Safety glazing materials Identification: Identify each piece or panel, to AS 1288. Noise reducing glazed assemblies Labelling: Label each panel with a legible non-permanent mark, self-destroying when removed, stating and certifying the Rw rating, and identifying the testing authority. Remove when directed. 2.5 LOUVRE WINDOW ASSEMBLIES General General: Provide louvre blades mounted in a metal surround frame or subframe and able to withstand the permissible-stress-design wind pressure for that location without failure or permanent distortion of members, and without blade flutter. Adjustable louvres General: Provide louvre blades clipped into blade holders pivoted to stiles or coupling mullions, linked together in banks, each bank operated by an operating handle incorporating a latching device, or by a locking bar. 2.6 VENTILATING LOUVRE ASSEMBLIES

General General: Provide metal louvre blades mounted in a metal surround frame or subframe and able to withstand the permissible-stress-design wind pressure for that location without failure or permanent distortion of members, and without blade flutter. Expansion joints Requirement: Provide for expansion and contraction in continuous sections (e.g. continuous louvres, interlocking mullions) at spacings not exceeding those recommended by the manufacturer, or 6 m, whichever is the lesser.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 91 September 2011

Melrose specification

Windows and glazed doors

Adjustable louvres General: Provide louvre blades clipped into blade holders pivoted to stiles or coupling mullions, linked together in banks, each bank operated by an operating handle incorporating a latching device, or by a locking bar. Framed adjustable louvres General: Provide louvre blades beaded into steel blade surround frames (sash) pivoted to pressed steel main frames, linked together in banks, each bank controlled by a proprietary sash operator. Fixed metal louvres General: Provide metal louvre blades mounted in a metal surround frame or subframe, installed as for metal window installations. Screens Requirement: Provide metallic coated steel wire or UPVC mesh screens behind louvres to prevent the entry of vermin, birds, rodents and wind blown leaves and papers. 2.7 INSECT SCREENS

Aluminium framed screens General: Provide aluminium extruded or folded box frame sections with mesh fixing channel, mitred, staked and screwed at corners. Provide an extended frame section where necessary to adapt to window opening gear. - Mesh: Bead the mesh into the frame channel with a continuous resilient gasket, so that the mesh is taut and without distortion. Fixed screens General: Provide fixed screens to the window frames with a clipping device which permits removal for cleaning. Hinged screens General: Hinge at the top to give access to opening sash. Roll up screens General: Provide a proprietary retractable insect screen comprising aluminium frame with baked enamel finish, fibreglass mesh beaded into the frame, and a retraction system including tension spring, nylon bearings, positive self-locking device, and plastic sealing strip at sill. Sliding screens General: Provide a matching aluminium head guide, sill runner, and frame stile sections for screens not part of the window frame. - Hardware: Nylon slide runners and finger pull handle. Provide pile strip closers against sash where necessary to close gaps. 2.8 BUSHFIRE SCREENS AND SEALS

Requirement Protection: Protect glazed windows and doors from the ingress of embers. Standard: To AS 3959. 2.9 SECURITY WINDOW GRILLES

General General: Provide proprietary metal security grille screens, or operable screen and frame, fixed to the building structure with tamper resistant fastenings. Security window grilles: To AS 5039. Installation: To AS 5040. 2.10 ALUMINIUM FRAME FINISHES Powder coatings Standard: To AS 3715. Grade: Architectural coating. Anodised Standard: To AS 1231. Thickness: 15 microns to 20 microns.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 92 September 2011

Melrose specification

Windows and glazed doors

2.11 ANCILLARY MATERIALS Trims Timber: Solid timber at least 19 mm thick, mitred at corners. Extruded gaskets and seals General: Provide seals to the Window and door seal schedule. Materials: Non cellular (solid) elastopressive seals as follows: - Flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC): To BS 2571, 100% solids with high consistency, ultra-violet stabilised. - Rubber products (neoprene, ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) or silicone rubber): To BS 4255-1. Flashings General: Corrosion resistant, compatible with the other materials in the installation, and coated with a non-staining compound where necessary. Standard: To AS/NZS 2904. Jointing materials General: Compatible with each other and with the contact surfaces and non staining to finished surfaces. Do not provide bituminous materials on absorbent surfaces. Nylon brush seals General: Dense nylon bristles locked into galvanized steel strips and fixed in a groove in the edge of the door or in purpose-made anodised aluminium holders fixed to the door with double sided PVC foam tape. Pile weather strips General: Polypropylene or equivalent pile and backing, low friction silicone treated, ultra-violet stabilised. Standard: To AAMA 701/702. Weather bars General: Provide a weather bar under hinged external doors, locate under the centres of closed doors. 3 3.1 EXECUTION GLASS PROCESSING

General Processing: Perform required processes on glass, including cutting, obscuring, silvering and bending. Form necessary holes, including for fixings, equipment, access openings and speaking holes. Process exposed glass edges to a finish not inferior to ground arrised. Glass processing schedule Glass element Location Type of process Finish

3.2

INSTALLATION

Glazing General: Install the glass so that: - Each piece is held firmly in place by permanent means which enable it to withstand the normal loadings and ambient conditions at its location without distortion or damage to glass and glazing materials. - Building movements are not transferred to the glass. - External glazing is watertight and airtight. Temporary marking: Use a method which does not harm the glass. Remove marking on completion.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

93

September 2011

Melrose specification

Windows and glazed doors

Toughened glass: Do not cut, work, or permanently mark after toughening. Use installation methods which prevent the glass making direct contact with metals or other non-resilient materials. Heat absorbing glass: In locations exposed to direct sunlight, provide wheel cut edges free from damage or blemishes, with minimum feather. Preglazing Window assemblies and glazed doors: Supply inclusive of glazing, shop preglazed. External timber framed glazing: Glaze with putty. Windows and glazed doors General: Install windows and glazed doors so that the frames: - Are plumb, level, straight and true within acceptable building tolerances. - Are fixed or anchored to the building structure in conformance with the wind action loading requirements. - Will not carry any building loads, including loads caused by structural deflection or shortening. - Allow for thermal movement. Weatherproofing Flashing and weatherings: Install flashings, weather bars, drips, storm moulds, caulking and pointing so that water is prevented from penetrating the building between the window frame and the building structure under the prevailing service conditions, including normal structural movement of the building. Fixing Fasteners and fastener spacing: Conform to the recommendations of the manufacturer. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners. Packing: Pack behind fixing points with durable full width packing. Prepared masonry openings: If fixing of timber windows to prepared anchorages needs fastening from the frame face, sink the fastener heads below the surface and fill the sinking flush with a material compatible with the surface finish. Joints General: Make accurately fitted tight joints so that neither fasteners nor fixing devices such as pins, screws, adhesives and pressure indentations are visible on exposed surfaces. Sealants: If priming is recommended, prime surfaces in contact with jointing materials. If frames are powder coated, apply a neutral cure sealant. Operation General: Ensure moving parts operate freely and smoothly, without binding or sticking, at correct tensions or operating forces and are lubricated. Protection Removal: Remove temporary protection measures from the following: - Contact mating surfaces before joining up. - Exposed surfaces. In situ touch up Polyester or fluoropolymer coatings: Contact supplier for approval to apply touch up products otherwise replace damaged material. Trim General: Provide mouldings, architraves, reveal linings, and other internal trim using materials and finishes matching the window frames. Install to make neat and clean junctions between frames and the adjoining building surfaces. 3.3 LOUVRE ASSEMBLIES

Installation General: Screw fix stiles and mullions to the building structure. Provide weather strips to heads and sills. Framed adjustable louvres Installation: Screw fix the main frame to the building structure with monel or stainless steel screws or masonry anchors of the type recommended by the louvre manufacturer.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

94

September 2011

Melrose specification

Windows and glazed doors

Metal louvres General: Provide metal louvre blades mounted in a metal surround frame or subframe, installed as for metal window installations. 3.4 COMPLETION

Trade clean Method: Clean with soft clean cloths and clean water, finishing with a clean squeegee. Do not use abrasive or alkaline materials. Extent: All frames and glass surfaces inside and out. Maintenance manual General: Submit the window and glazed door manufacturers published instructions for operation, care and maintenance. Warranties Window and door assemblies: Submit the manufacturers published product warranties. 4 SELECTIONS

Refer to architectural drawings and schedules

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

95

September 2011

Melrose specification

Louvre windows

LOUVRE WINDOWS

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide louvre windows as documented. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. Manufacturer's documents 1.3 STANDARDS

General Selection and installation: To AS 2047. Glazing Glass type and thickness: To AS 1288, where no glass type or thickness is given. Materials and installation: To AS 1288. Quality requirements for cut-to-size and processed glass: To AS/NZS 4667. Terminology for work on glass: To AS/NZS 4668. 1.4 INTERPRETATION

Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply: - Louvres: Horizontal louvres that span between frame mullions or mullions. - U-value: Total U-Value as defined by BCA and determined in accordance with NFRC 100. - SHGC: Solar heat gain coefficient as defined by BCA and determined in accordance with NFRC 200. 1.5 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Openings prepared to receive windows (where windows are to be installed in prepared openings). - Fabricated window assemblies at the factory ready for delivery to the site. - Fabricated window assemblies delivered to the site, before installation. - Commencement of window installation. 1.6 SUBMISSIONS

Samples Submit samples of louvre window framing as follows: - Accessory and hardware items specified descriptively or by performance (i.e. not specified as proprietary items) including locks, latches, handles, catches, sash operators, anchor brackets and attachments, masonry anchors and weather seals (pile or extruded). - Colour samples of prefinished production material (e.g. anodised or organic coated extrusions and sheet) showing the limits of the range of variation in the selected colour. - Joints made by proposed techniques. - Sections proposed to be used for frames and louvre blades. - Label each sample, giving the Series code reference and date of manufacture. Submit samples of glazing materials, each at least 200 x 200 mm, showing specified visual properties and the range of variation, if any, for each of the following types of glass:
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 96 September 2011

Melrose specification

Louvre windows

- Tinted or coloured glass. - Patterned or obscured glass or glazing plastics. Shop drawings Submit shop drawings to a scale that best describes the detail, showing the following information: - Full size sections of members. - Hardware, fittings and accessories including fixing details. - Junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces. - Layout (sectional plan and elevation) of the window assembly. - Lubrication requirements. - Methods of assembly. - Methods of installation, including fixing, caulking and flashing. - Provision for vertical and horizontal expansion. Certification: Submit an engineers certificate confirming compliance with AS 2047. Subcontractors General: Submit names and contact details of proposed manufacturers and installers. Have windows and glazed doors installed by their manufacturer or by a subcontractor recommended by the manufacturer. Type-test reports General: Submit type-test reports verifying conformance to AS 2047 and the Window and glazed door performance schedule. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS GENERAL

Standards Flashings: To AS/NZS 2904. Aluminium extrusions: To AS/NZS 1866. 2.2 GLASS

Glass types and quality Standard: To AS/NZS 4667. Glazing plastics General: Free from surface abrasions, and warranted by the manufacturer for 10 years against yellowing or other colour change, loss of strength and impact resistance, and general deterioration. Safety glasses Standard: To AS/NZS 2208. Certification: Required. Certification provider: An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand (JAS-ANZ). 2.3 LOUVRE WINDOW ASSEMBLIES

General Description: Provide louvre blades mounted in a metal surround frame or subframe and able to withstand the permissible-stress-design wind pressure for that location without failure or permanent distortion of members, and without blade flutter. Adjustable louvres Description: Provide louvre blades clipped into blade holders pivoted to stiles or coupling mullions, linked together in banks, each bank operated by an operating handle incorporating a latching device, or by a locking bar. 2.4 INSECT SCREENS

Aluminium framed screens General: Provide aluminium extruded or folded box frame sections with mesh fixing channel, mitred, staked and screwed at corners. Provide an extended frame section where necessary to adapt to window opening gear.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 97 September 2011

Melrose specification

Louvre windows

- Mesh: Bead the mesh into the frame channel with a continuous resilient gasket, so that the mesh is taut and without distortion. Fixed screens General: Provide fixed screens to the window frames with a clipping device which permits removal for cleaning. Roll up screens General: Provide a proprietary retractable insect screen comprising aluminium frame with baked enamel finish, fibreglass mesh beaded into the frame, and a retraction system including tension spring, nylon bearings, positive self-locking device, and plastic sealing strip at sill. 2.5 BUSHFIRE SCREENS AND SEALS

Requirement Protection: Protect glazed windows and doors from the ingress of embers. Standard: To AS 3959. 2.6 SECURITY WINDOW GRILLES

General General: Provide proprietary metal security grille screens, or operable screen and frame, fixed to the building structure with tamper resistant fastenings. Security window grilles: To AS 5040. Installation: To AS 5039. 2.7 ALUMINIUM FRAME FINISHES

Powder coatings Product: Refer to architectural drawings and schedule of windows and doors Colour: Refer to architectural drawings and schedule of windows and doors Anodised Thickness: 20 microns. 3 3.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION

Glazing General: Install the glass so that: - Each piece is held firmly in place by permanent means which enable it to withstand the normal loadings and ambient conditions at its location without distortion or damage to glass and glazing materials. - Building movements are not transferred to the glass. - External glazing is watertight and airtight. Temporary marking: Use a method which does not harm the glass. Remove marking on completion. Toughened glass: Do not cut, work, or permanently mark after toughening. Use installation methods which prevent the glass making direct contact with metals or other non-resilient materials. Heat absorbing glass: In locations exposed to direct sunlight, provide wheel cut edges free from damage or blemishes, with minimum feather. Louvre windows General: Install windows so that the frames: - Are plumb, level, straight and true within acceptable building tolerances. - Are fixed or anchored to the building structure in conformance with the wind action requirements. - Will not carry any building loads, including loads caused by structural deflection or shortening. - Allow for thermal movement. Flashing and weatherings General: Install flashings, weather bars, drips, storm moulds, caulking and pointing so that water is prevented from penetrating the building between the window frame and the building structure under the prevailing service conditions, including normal structural movement of the building.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 98 September 2011

Melrose specification

Louvre windows

Fixing Fastener spacing (nominal): 600 mm. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners. Packing: Pack behind fixing points with durable full width packing. Prepared masonry openings: If fixing of timber windows to prepared anchorages needs fastening from the frame face, sink the fastener heads below the surface and fill the sinking flush with a material compatible with the surface finish. Joints General: Make accurately fitted tight joints so that neither fasteners nor fixing devices such as pins, screws, adhesives and pressure indentations are visible on exposed surfaces. Sealants: If priming is recommended, prime surfaces in contact with jointing materials. Installers General: Have windows installed by their manufacturer or by a subcontractor recommended by the manufacturer. Operation General: Ensure moving parts operate freely and smoothly, without binding or sticking, at correct tensions or operating forces and are lubricated. Protection Removal: Remove temporary protection measures from the following: - Contact mating surfaces before joining up. - Exposed surfaces. In situ touch up Polyester or fluoropolymer coatings: Contact supplier for approval to apply touch up products otherwise replace damaged material. Trim General: Provide mouldings, architraves, reveal linings, and other internal trim using materials and finishes matching the window frames. Install to make neat and clean junctions between frames and the adjoining building surfaces. 3.2 COMPLETION

Trade clean Method: Clean with soft clean cloths and clean water, finishing with a clean squeegee. Do not use abrasive or alkaline materials. Extent: All frames and glass surfaces inside and out. Maintenance manual General: Submit the louvre window manufacturers published instructions for operation, care and maintenance. Warranty Window and door assemblies: - Form: Against failure of materials and execution under normal environment and use conditions. - Period: As offered by the manufacturer. - Powder coating: As offered by the manufacturer for the selected finish. - Hardware: As offered by the manufacturer. 4 SELECTIONS

Refer to architectural drawings and schedules

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

99

September 2011

Melrose specification

Glazing

GLAZING

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Conform to the Selections. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. Design Certification: Submit an engineers certificate confirming compliance with AS 1288. Performance Thermal qualities: U value and Solar heat gain coefficient to Selections. 1.3 STANDARDS

Glazing Glass type and thickness: To AS 1288, where no glass type or thickness is nominated. Materials and installation: To AS 1288. Insulating Glass Units: To AS/NZS 4666. Quality requirements for cut-to-size and processed glass: To AS/NZS 4667. Roof glazing: To AS 1288 Section 6. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS GENERAL

Heat soaking Requirement: All toughened glass products. Standard: To EN 14179-1. Heat strengthening Requirement: Heat strengthen all glass that requires extra strength and thermal resistance. 2.2 GLASS

Glass types and quality Standard: To AS 1288 and AS/NZS 4667. Glass and glazing materials Glass and glazing materials generally: Free from defects which detract from appearance or interfere with performance under normal conditions of use. Glazing plastics: Free from surface abrasions, and warranted by the manufacturer for 10 years against yellowing or other colour change, loss of strength and impact resistance, and general deterioration. Safety glasses Standard: To AS/NZS 2208. Certification: Required. Certification provider: An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand (JAS-ANZ). Type: Grade A to AS 1288 when used in curtain walls. Insulating glass units (IGUs) Manufacture and installation: To AS/NZS 4666. Glass thickness selection: To AS 1288.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

100

September 2011

Melrose specification

Glazing

2.3

GLAZING MATERIALS

General Glazing materials (including putty, glazing compounds, sealants, gaskets, glazing tapes, spacing strips, spacing tapes, spacers, setting blocks and compression wedges): Appropriate for the conditions of application and the required performance. Jointing materials Compatibility: Provide recommended jointing and pointing materials which are compatible with each other and with the contact surfaces and non-staining to finished surfaces. Do not provide bituminous materials on absorbent surfaces. Glazing tapes Standards: To AAMA 800, Products coded 804.3, 806.3, or 807.3, as applicable. Elastomeric sealants General: Provide elastomeric sealants in conformance with the Elastomeric sealant schedule. Sealing compound (polyurethane, polysulphide, acrylic): - Single component: Type II, Class A. - Multi component: To ASTM C920. Sealing compound (silicone): - Single component: Class A. - Multi component: To ASTM C920. Sealing compound (butyl): To ASTM C1311. Glazing compounds: To AAMA 800 coded 802.3 (Types I or II), or 805.2, as applicable. Narrow joint seam sealer: To AAMA 800, Products coded 803.3. Exterior perimeter sealing compound: To AAMA 800. Non drying sealant: To AAMA 800. Expanded cellular glazing tape: To AAMA 800. Very high bond pressure sensitive tapes: To ASTM D897, ASTM D1002, ASTM D3330M, ASTM D3652M, ASTM D3654M, or ASTM D3715M. Elastomeric sealants schedule Sealant type Material Location or function

Pile weather strips Standard: To AAMA 701/702. Materials: Polypropylene or equivalent pile and backing, low friction silicone treated, ultra violet stabilised. Finned type: A pile weather seal with a central polypropylene fin bonded into the centre of the backing rod and raised above the pile level. Extruded gaskets and seals Type: Non cellular (solid) elastopressive seals. Material: - Rubber products (neoprene, ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) or silicone rubber): To BS 4255-1. - Flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC): To BS 2571, E type compounds, colour fastness grade B. Priming Compatibility: Apply the recommended primer to the surfaces in contact with sealant materials. Control joints Depth of elastomeric sealant: One half the joint width, or 6 mm, whichever is the greater. Foamed materials (in compressible fillers and backing rods): Closed-cell or impregnated types which do not absorb water.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

101

September 2011

Melrose specification

Glazing

Bond breaking: Provide backing rods, and other back-up materials for sealants, which do not adhere to the sealant. 2.4 GLASS IDENTIFICATION

Safety glazing materials Identification: Identify each piece or panel, to AS 1288. Noise reducing glazed assemblies Identification: Label each panel with a legible non-permanent mark, self-destroying when removed, stating and certifying the Rw rating, and identifying the testing authority. Remove when directed. 3 3.1 EXECUTION GLASS PROCESSING

General Processing: Perform required processes on glass, including cutting, obscuring, silvering and bending. Form necessary holes, including for fixings, equipment, access openings and speaking holes. Process exposed glass edges to a finish not inferior to ground arrised. Glass processing schedule Glass element Location Type of process Finish

3.2

INSTALLATION

Glazing General: Install the glass so that: - Each piece is held firmly in place by permanent means which enable it to withstand the normal loadings and ambient conditions at its location without distortion or damage to glass and glazing materials. - Building movements are not transferred to the glass. - External glazing is watertight and airtight. Temporary marking: Use a method which does not harm the glass. Remove marking on completion. Toughened glass: Do not cut, work, or permanently mark after toughening. Use installation methods which prevent the glass making direct contact with metals or other non-resilient materials. Heat absorbing glass: In locations exposed to direct sunlight, provide wheel cut edges free from damage or blemishes, with minimum feather. Preglazing Window assemblies and glazed doors: Supply inclusive of glazing, shop preglazed. Curtain walls: Supply inclusive of glazing, shop preglazed. External timber framed glazing: Glaze with putty. 3.3 COMPLETION

Trade clean Method: Clean with soft clean cloths and clean water, finishing with a clean squeegee. Do not use abrasive or alkaline materials. Extent: All frames and glass surfaces inside and out. Warranties General: Submit a warranty, signed by the glazing subcontractor, undertaking to repair or replace glass and glazing materials which, within the warranty period, become defective or prove unsuitable for the specified application; provided that the manufacturers recommendations for the maintenance of the material have been followed during the warranty period. Glass manufacturers warranty: An undertaking, conditional only on compliance with the manufacturers recommendation for installation and maintenance, to supply replacement glass units to the site for replacement of defective units defined as follows:
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 102 September 2011

Melrose specification

Glazing

- IGU units: Units in which the hermetic seal has failed as evidenced by intrusion of foreign matter, or internal condensation at temperature above 2C. - Coated glass units (including coated SIG units): Units in which the metallic coating shows evidence of manufacturing defects, including but not necessarily limited to cracking or peeling, as determined in accordance with ASTM C1048. Toughened glass warranty: The manufacturers warranty certifying that toughened glass supplied for use in curtain walls has been subjected to a heat soaking process which has converted at least 95% of the nickel sulphide content to the stable beta-phase. Maintenance manual Requirement: Submit manufacturers published recommendations for service use. Cleaning Requirement: Replace damaged glass and leave the work clean, polished, free from defects, and in good condition. 4 SELECTIONS

Refer to architectural drawings and schedules

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

103

September 2011

Melrose specification

Insulation and sarking membranes

INSULATION AND SARKING MEMBRANES

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide insulation and sarking membrane systems: - Complete for their function. - Conforming to the detail and location drawings. - Firmly fixed in position. - Maintain their performance for the life of the building. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. - Architectural schedules and drawings 1.3 STANDARDS

Installation of mineral wool insulation Comply with the ICANZ Industry Code of Practice for the Safe Use of Glass Wool and Rock Wool Insulation. Marking: Deliver mineral wool products to site in packaging labelled FBS1 BIOSOLUBLE INSULATION. 1.4 INTERPRETATION

Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply: - Terminology: To AS/NZS 4859.1. - Fire hazard properties: To BCA A2.4. - Sarking membrane: Flexible membrane material normally used for waterproofing, vapour proofing or thermal reflectance. - FBS-1 Glass wool: Spun fibres of molten glass, utilizing up to 60% recycled waste glass, thermally bonded to form batts, blankets and sheets for thermal and acoustic insulation. - FBS-1 Rock wool: Spun fibres of molten rock thermally bonded to form batts and blankets for thermal and acoustic insulation. - Polyester insulation: Polyester fibres thermally bonded to form batts and blankets. - Vapour barrier: A material or system that adequately impedes the transmission of water vapour under specified conditions. - Breathable (vapour permeable) membrane: A flexible membrane material normally used for secondary waterproofing that allows for the transmission of water vapour. 1.5 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the sarking, vapour barrier and insulation before they are covered up or concealed. 1.6 SUBMISSIONS

Fire hazard properties General: Submit evidence of conformance with the following: - Fire hazard indices for all materials when tested in conformance with AS/NZS 1530.3, including, if the material has a reflective facing, scoring and blackening to AS/NZS 1530.3 clause A6: . Spread of flame index: 0.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 104 September 2011

Melrose specification

Insulation and sarking membranes

. Smoke developed index: 3. - Facing materials: Flammability index < 5 when tested in conformance with AS/NZS 1530.2. Thermal properties General: Submit evidence of conformance with AS/NZS 4859.1. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS INSULATION MATERIALS

Fire hazard properties General: Fire hazard indices for all materials when tested in conformance with AS/NZS 1530.3: - Spread of flame index: 0. - Smoke developed index: 3. - Materials with reflective facing: Test to AS/NZS 1530.3 clause A6. Facing materials: Flammability index < 5 when tested in conformance with AS/NZS 1530.2. Non-combustible construction required for all insulation Bulk and reflective insulation Cellulosic fibre (loose fill): To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 5. Mineral wool blankets and cut pieces: To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 8. Polyester: To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 7. Polyisocyanurate (rigid cellular sheets RC/PIR): To AS 1366.2. Polystyrene (extruded rigid cellular sheets RC/PS-E): To AS 1366.4. Polystyrene (moulded rigid cellular sheets): To AS 1366.3. Polyurethane (rigid cellular sheets): To AS 1366.1. Polyurethane (sprayed): To ASTM D6694. Reflective insulation: To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 9. Wet processed fibreboard (including softboard): To AS/NZS 1859.4. Wool: To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 6. Certification: Required. Certification provider: An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand (JAS-ANZ). Sarking membranes Standard: To AS/NZS 4200.1. Thermal performance: To AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 9. Breathable (vapour permeable) membrane: Vapour resistance of not more than 0.5 MNs/g when tested to AS/NZS 4200.1. Fasteners and supports General: Metallic-coated steel. Mesh support to roof insulation Metallic-coated steel wire netting: To AS 2423 Section 4. - Size: 45 mm mesh x 1 mm diameter. Welded safety mesh: To AS/NZS 4389. 3 3.1 EXECUTION GENERAL

Framed wall thermal break strips Product type: Proprietary item. Application: To steel or timber framing with lightweight external cladding. R-value: 0.2. Screw fixing: Button head screws at 1 m centres. Adhesive fixing: Wallboard adhesive walnuts at 1 m centres.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 105 September 2011

Melrose specification

Insulation and sarking membranes

Bulk insulation Installation: To AS 3999 and BCA J1.2. General: Ensure batts or blankets are firmly butted with no gaps except as follows: - Access openings and vents: Do not obstruct. - Light fittings: To AS/NZS 3000 clause 4.5. - Electrical cables: Prevent contact with polystyrene insulation by wrapping the cable with foil tape. Sarking membrane Standard: To AS/NZS 4200.2. 3.2 FLOOR INSULATION

Under suspended framed floors - bulk insulation Product type: Fibre batts. Batts: Fit tightly between framing members. If support is not otherwise provided, staple nylon twine to the framing and stretch tight. Below concrete slab on ground Product type: Rigid cellular extruded sheets. Laying pattern: Stretcher bond, with edges tightly butted. Location: Under the damp proof membrane. Over concrete slab on ground Product type: Rigid cellular extruded sheets. Application: Under slab heating. Substrate preparation: Ensure substrates are as follows: - Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location of tiles. - Excessive projections are removed. - Voids and hollows > 10 mm with abrupt edges are filled with a cement:sand mix not stronger than the substrate nor weaker than the bedding. Extent: The entire heated slab. Laying pattern: Stretcher bond, with edges tightly butted. Under suspended concrete slab Product type: Rigid cellular extruded sheets. Joints: Apply reinforced foil tape to all joints. Over framed suspended floors Product type: Rigid cellular extruded sheets. Under framed suspended floors Product type: Rigid cellular extruded sheets. Reflective sarking membrane Fixing: Install as follows: - To timber: Proprietary fixings or metallic-coated clouts or staples at 300 mm maximum centres. - To steel: Tek screw with either 20 mm diameter washers or fixed through hardboard strips. Overlap (minimum): 150 mm and adhesive tape fix. Support mesh: 300 x 150 mm mesh size of 2 mm wire gauge to AS/NZS 4389. 3.3 WALL INSULATION

Bulk insulation to framed walls Product type: Fibre batts. Batts: Friction fit between framing members. If support is not otherwise provided, staple nylon twine to the framing and stretch tight. Full masonry cavity walls Product: Rigid cellular insulation board. Application: To the inner brick skin. Fixing: Proprietary plastic clips on pre-installed wall ties.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

106

September 2011

Melrose specification

Insulation and sarking membranes

Installation: Horizontally with the tongue to the top edge and firmly against the inner brick skin. Keep boards clean and dry and free from mortar and grout. Do not bridge the cavity. Flashings: Install flashings before installing insulation panels. Prevent entry of water behind the insulation boards. Masonry veneer cavity walls Product: Rigid cellular insulation board. Application: To steel or timber framing. Installation: Horizontally with the tongue to the top edge pushed through prefixed wall ties and held firmly against the wall frame. Keep boards clean and dry and free from mortar and grout. Do not bridge the cavity. Fixing: No. 12-14 x 45 mm Hex Buildex Hi Teks screws at 450 mm centres. Flashings: Install flashings before installing insulation panels. Prevent entry of water behind the insulation boards. Retrofit masonry walls internal face Product type: Rigid cellular extruded sheets. Preparation: Ensure substrates have: - Any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion cleaned off. - Excessive projections hacked off and voids and hollows filled with plaster. - Tolerance: 6 mm in 2400 mm. Substrate correction: Skim plaster. Installation: Apply boards horizontally with staggered vertical joints, all close butted and without crushing. Fixing: Proprietary adhesive compatible to both the membrane and the rigid cellular extruded sheets . Apply sufficient pressure to ensure even adhesive distribution. Final finish: Apply plasterers scrim to all joints and prepare the surface as required by the manufacturer of the final finish. Vapour permeable wall wrap Application: Provide wall wrap behind cladding which does not provide a permanent weatherproof seal or may be subject to condensation forming on the internal face, including the following: - Boards fixed vertically or diagonally. - Boards or planks fixed in exposed locations where wind driven rain can penetrate the joints. - Unpainted or unsealed cladding. - Behind external cladding in bushfire prone areas to AS 3959. - Masonry veneer. Installation: Fix wall wrap to all framing members after being pulled taught over the framing. Apply to run horizontally to the outer face of external stud walls from the bottom plate up, over the flashing. Seal across the wall cavity at the top. Horizontal laps: At least 150 mm wide with the direction of the lap ensuring that water is shed to the outer face of the membrane. End or vertical overlaps laps: At least 150 mm wide made over framing. Installation: Run the wall wrap over the openings and leave covered until fenestrations are to be installed. Cut the membrane on a 45 diagonal from each corner of the opening and fold the flaps inside and fix to the inside frame of the opening. If the membrane is used to provide a continuous air tight layer, seal all joints with pressure sensitive adhesive tape. Fixing to timber frames: Metallic-coated clouts, 20 mm long 6-8 mm staples or punched multi-point metallic-coated steel brads. Fixing to steel or aluminium: Tek screw with either 20 mm diameter washers or through hardboard strips. Fixing to plywood: Alternatives: - Metallic-coated clouts, 20 mm long 6-8 mm staples or punched multi-point metallic-coated steel brads. Fixing centres: At least 300 mm. - Water based contact adhesive with a 50% adhesive cover.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

107

September 2011

Melrose specification

Insulation and sarking membranes

3.4

ROOF INSULATION

Mesh support to roof insulation Locations: Provide support to the following: - Sarking, vapour barrier or reflective thermal insulation membranes laid over roof framing members which are spaced at more than 900 mm centres. - Blanket type thermal insulation laid over roof framing members as sound insulation to metal roofing. Installing wire netting: Lay over the roof framing providing sufficient slack or sag between members to suit the application. Fixing wire netting: Staple to timber frame, wire to steel frame. Installing welded safety mesh: To AS/NZS 4389. Roof sarking Sarking membrane: - Installation to AS 2050. - Location: Provide sarking under tile and shingle roofs. Vapour barrier Installation: Lay over the roof support frame with sufficient sag to allow the bulk insulation to achieve its full thickness. Overlap roll edges 150 mm and seal all joints with pressure sensitive adhesive tape. Bulk insulation metal roofs Batts: Fit tightly between framing members. Blanket for sound insulation: Install over the roof support frame, reflective thermal insulation (if any), and mesh support, so that the blanket is in continuous contact with the underside of the metal roofing sheets. 3.5 COMPLETION

Warranties Insulation: Submit the manufacturers published product warranties. - Warranty: Provide a warranty on all products - Minimum period: 12 months 4 4.1 SELECTIONS FLOOR INSULATION

Under existing timber floor Type: Polystrene Selection: Foamex, Expol underfloor insulation or similar R-value: 1.4 Location: Under all existing timber floors 4.2 WALL INSULATION

Bulk thermal insulation to 90 mm framing Product: Tontine thermal polyester batts or similar to all new or existing accessible walls R-value: min 2.0 Location: all new timber framed walls Wall wrap (wall sarking) Location: Install sarking to new timber framed walls 4.3 CEILING INSULATION

Bulk thermal insulation Product: Tontine thermal polyester batts or similar R-value: min 2.5 Location: To all ceiling spaces new and existing.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 108 September 2011

Melrose specification

Insulation and sarking membranes

4.4

ROOF INSULATION

General Location: The whole of the roof area including skylight shaft walls, except the following: - Eaves, overhangs, skylights, vents and openings. - Roofs to outbuildings, garages, and semi-enclosed spaces such as verandahs, porches and carports. Sarking insulation Product: Air-cell glare shield or similar Location: To all new roofs

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

109

September 2011

Melrose specification

Lining

LINING

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide internal lining systems to the Selections. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. 1.3 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of substrate or framing before installation of linings. 1.4 TOLERANCES

Surface Flatness, twist, winding and bow: 1.5 mm deviation from a 1.5 m straightedge placed in any position. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

Plasterboard Selection: Boral or similar, sheets to be branded with manufacturers name Standard: To AS/NZS 2588. Location: To new walls, Thickness (mm): 13mm Edge finish: square Wet area plasterboard Selection: Boral wet area plasterboard or similar Standard: To AS/NZS 2588. Location: To new walls, Thickness (mm): 10mm Edge finish: square Fibre cement Standard: To AS/NZS 2908.2. Wall and ceiling linings: Type B category 2. Minimum thickness: 4.5 mm. Location: To new external walls

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

110

September 2011

Melrose specification

Lining

Plywood and blockboard Interior use: To AS/NZS 2270. Exterior use: To AS/NZS 2271. Visible surfaces with a clear finish: Veneer quality A. Other visible surfaces: Veneer quality B. Back/face veneer: Veneer quality C or D. Presealed plywood: Plywood pre-sealed both sides and edges with a machine applied sealer. Decorative overlaid wood panels Standard: To AS/NZS 1859.3. Certification General: Brand panels under the authority of a recognised certification program applicable to the product. Locate the brand on faces or edges which will be concealed in the works. High pressure decorative laminate sheet Standard: To AS/NZS 2924.1. Coated steel Standard: To AS 1397. - Coating class interior: Z275. - Coating class exterior: Z450. Fasteners Steel nails: Hot dip galvanized. Adhesives For wallboards: Gunnable synthetic rubber/resin based mastic contact adhesive formulated for bonding flooring and wallboards to a variety of substrates. Sealants Fire rated sealant: Non-hardening sealant compatible with the materials to be sealed and having a fire rating equal to that of the partition it seals. Acoustic sealant: Non-hardening sealant compatible with the materials to be sealed and having a specific gravity of not less than 1.5 gm/cubic centimetre and of 100% polyurethane mastic. 3 3.1 EXECUTION CONSTRUCTION GENERALLY

Conditions Commencement: Do not commence lining work until such time as the building or zone in question is enclosed and weathertight and all wet trades have been completed. Substrates or framing General: Before fixing linings check and, if necessary, adjust the alignment of substrates or framing. Battens General: Fix at each crossing with structural framing members, or direct to solid walls or ceilings. Provide wall plugs in solid backgrounds. Ceiling linings General: Do not install until at least 14 days after the timber roof structure is fully loaded. Accessories and trim General: Provide accessories and trim necessary to complete the installation. Adhesives General: Provide adhesives of types appropriate to their purpose, and apply them so that they transmit the loads imposed, without causing discolouration of finished surfaces. 3.2 PLASTERBOARD LINING

Supports General: Install timber battens or proprietary cold-formed galvanized steel furring channels as follows: - Where framing member spacing exceeds the recommended spacing.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 111 September 2011

Melrose specification

Lining

- Where direct fixing of the plasterboard is not possible due to the arrangement or alignment of the framing or substrate. - Where the lining is the substrate for tiled finishes. Transverse walls: Locate noggings as follows: - At least 150 mm from the horizontal joint. - Ensure that noggings do not protrude beyond the face of studs. Installation Gypsum plasterboard and fibre reinforced gypsum lining: To AS/NZS 2589. Multiple sheet layers Application: Fire rated and acoustic rated walls. Joints: Fill and flush up all joints and fixings in each layer and caulk up perimeters and penetrations before commencing succeeding layers. Stagger all sheet joints by minimum 200 mm. Joints Flush joints: Provide recessed edge sheets and finish flush using perforated paper reinforcing tape. Butt joints: Make joints over framing members or otherwise provide back blocking. External corner joints: Make joints over metallic-coated steel corner beads. Dry joints: Provide square edged sheet and finish with a UPVC joining section. Control joints: Provide purpose-made metallic-coated control joint beads at not more than 12 m centres in walls and ceilings and to coincide with structural control joints. Wet areas: Install additional supports, flashings, trim and sealants as required. Joints in tiled areas: Do not apply a topping coat after bedding perforated paper tape in bedding compound. 3.3 FIBRE CEMENT LINING

Supports General: Install timber battens or proprietary cold-formed galvanized steel furring channels as follows: - Where framing member spacing exceeds the recommended spacing. - Where direct fixing of the fibre cement is not possible due to the arrangement or alignment of the framing or substrate. - Where the lining is the substrate for tiled finishes. Installation General: Run sheets across the framing members. In flush jointed applications, stagger end joints in a brick pattern and locate them on framing members, away from the corners of large openings. Provide supports at edges and joints. Timber framed construction: Nail only or combined with adhesive. Steel framed construction: Screw only or combined with adhesive. Wall framing: - Do not fix to top and bottom plates or noggings. - In tiled areas: Provide an extra row of noggings immediately above wall-to-floor flashings. Fix sheet at 150 mm centres to each stud and around the perimeter of the sheet. Masonry wall construction: - Fix using adhesive direct to masonry, but do not fix direct to masonry as a substrate for tiled finish. - Fix to furring channels using screw or screw and adhesive. Ceilings: Fix using screw or screw and adhesive to ceiling furring members. Do not fix sheets to the bottom chords of trusses. Wet areas: Do not use adhesive fixing alone. Multiple sheet layers Application: Fire rated and acoustic rated walls. Joints: Fill and flush up all joints and fixings in each layer and caulk up perimeters and penetrations before commencing succeeding layers. Stagger all sheet joints by minimum 200 mm. Joints Flush joints: Provide recessed edge sheets and finish flush using perforated paper reinforcing tape.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 112 September 2011

Melrose specification

Lining

External corner joints: Make joints over metallic-coated steel corner beads. Dry joints: Provide square edged sheet and finish with a UPVC joining section. Control joints: Provide control joints to coincide with structural control joints and as follows: - Walls: 7.2 m centres. - Ceilings: To divide into bays not larger than 10.8 x 7.2 m. - Soffit linings: To divide into bays not larger than 4.2 x 4.2 m or 5.6 x 3.6 m. - Control joint beads: Purpose-made metallic coated. - Support: Provide framing parallel to the joint on each side. Do not fix the lining to abutting building surfaces. Wet areas: Provide additional supports, flashings, trim and sealants as required. Joints in tiled areas: Bed perforated paper tape in bedding compound. Do not apply a topping coat. - Control joints: Space to suit joints required in tiling. - Internal corners: Reinforce with metallic-coated steel angles. In corners subject to continuous moisture, flash over the angle and under the sheeting with continuous bitumen coated aluminium flashing. 3.4 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

General General: Provide trim such as beads, mouldings and stops to make neat junctions between lining components, finishes and adjacent surfaces. Proprietary items: Provide complete with installation accessories. Timber trim Hardwood: AS 2796.1. Cypress pine: AS 1810. Softwood: To AS 4785.1. - Grade: To AS 4785.2.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

113

September 2011

Melrose specification

Joinery

JOINERY

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Fabricate and install joinery items to backgrounds undamaged, plumb, level, straight and free of distortion and to the Tolerances table. Tolerances table Property Tolerance criteria Plumb and level 1 mm in 800 mm Offsets in flush adjoining surfaces < 0.5 mm Offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces < 2 mm Alignment of adjoining doors < 0.5 mm Difference in scribe thickness for joinery items < 2 mm centred between walls Doors centred in openings zero Joints in finished surfaces zero 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. 1.3 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Shop fabricated or assembled items ready for delivery to the site. - Openings prepared to receive assemblies. - Site erected assemblies on completion of erection, before covering up by cladding and encasing. - Surfaces prepared for, and immediately before, site applied finishes. - Completion of installation. 1.4 SUBMISSIONS

Samples generally General: Submit samples to the Sample table. Sample table Description Each type of board to be used complete with finish and edge stripping Each type of joint Typical item of hardware indicating each finish Samples of the selected stone cladding showing the maximum expected variation Samples of the selected timber veneer showing the maximum expected variation Patch of each nominated fabric The finish to all stainless steel items Complete timber bench cupboard door, including hardware Complete drawer front, including hardware

No. of samples 2 2 2 2 x 3 variants 2 x 3 variants 2 2 1 1

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

114

September 2011

Melrose specification

Joinery

Clear finished samples Initial submission: - Veneered board: Three samples each 600 x 600 mm for each species. - Solid timber: Three samples each 40 x 19 x 600 mm for each species. Control sample: The approved selection from the initial submission. Finished sample: Cut the control sample in half and apply the finish to half the remaining area. Shop drawings General: Submit shop drawings to a scale that best describes the detail, showing the following: - Overall dimensions. - Materials, thicknesses and finishes of elements including doors, divisions, shelves and benches. - Type of construction including mitre joints and junctions of members. - Hardware type and location. - Temporary bracing, if required. - Procedures for shop and site assembly and fixing. - Locations of benchtop joints. - Stone benchtop layout including joint arrangement and penetrations. - Locations of sanitary fixtures, stoves, ovens, sinks, and other items to be installed in the units. - Relationship of fixture to adjacent building elements. - Proposals for the break-up of large items as required for delivery to the site. - Proposed method of joining the modules of large items. Timing: Before fabrication. Timing: Before fabrication. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS JOINERY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

Visible work Clear finished timber and veneer: Ensure all visible surfaces are free of branding, crayon or chalk marks and of blemishes caused by handling. Joinery timber Hardwood: To AS 2796.3. Seasoned cypress pine: To AS 1810. Softwood: To AS 4785.3. Finished sizes: For milled timbers actual dimensions which are at least the required dimensions, except for dimensions qualified by a term such as nominal or out of to which industry standards for finished sizes apply. Plywood Interior use generally: To AS/NZS 2270. Interior use, exposed to moisture: To AS/NZS 2271. Visible surface with a clear finish: Veneer quality A. Other visible surfaces: Veneer quality C or D. Non-structural glued laminated timber Standard: AS 5067. Wet processed fibreboard (including hardboard) Standard: To AS/NZS 1859.4. Particleboard Standard: To AS/NZS 1859.1. Melamine overlaid particleboard: Particleboard overlaid on both sides with low pressure melamine. Dry-processed fibreboard (including medium density fibreboard) Standard: To AS/NZS 1859.2.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

115

September 2011

Melrose specification

Joinery

Melamine overlaid medium density fibreboard: Medium density fibreboard (STD MDF) overlaid on both sides with low pressure melamine. Decorative overlaid wood panels Standard: To AS/NZS 1859.3. Certification General: Brand panels under the authority of a recognised certification program applicable to the product. Locate the brand on faces or edges which will be concealed in the works. High-pressure decorative laminate sheets Standard: To AS/NZS 2924.1. Class CG (S or F) Definition Compact general purpose Typical applications High performance, self supporting vertical or horizontal surfaces High performance horizontal surfaces General horizontal surfaces and high performance vertical surfaces General vertical surfaces and light duty horizontal surfaces Light duty vertical surfaces

HD (S or F) HG (S, or P)

Horizontal heavy duty Horizontal general purpose

VG (S, or P) VL (S)

Vertical general purpose Vertical light duty

Thickness (minimum): - For horizontal surfaces fixed to a continuous background: 1.2 mm. - For vertical surfaces fixed to a continuous background: 0.8 mm. - For post formed laminate fixed to a continuous background: 0.8 mm. - For vertical surfaces fixed intermittently (e.g. to studs): 3.0 mm. - For edge strips: 0.4 mm. Stone facings General: Provide stone slabs within the visual range of the approved samples. Repair mud veins or lines of separation that are integral to the selected pattern with resin fillers and back lining. Toughened glass panels Vinyl and linoleum Material: Desktop grade sheeting. Fixing: Spray adhesives to flat surfaces and double-stick contact adhesive method to curved surfaces. Splashbacks Glass: 6 mm toughened colourback glass with a factory applied opaque coating to the back. - Standard: To AS/NZS 2208. Stainless steel: Grade 304, fine linished finish. 2.2 JOINERY ITEMS

General Refer to documents as follows: - Drawings: Joinery units and their location, indicative construction details, scribes and trims, materials, dimensions and thicknesses, and finishes. - Drawings: Confirm on site all dimensions noted, after the completion of partitions. - Finishes schedules or drawings: Finishes selections. - Specification: Joinery hardware fittings and systems. 2.3 JOINERY ASSEMBLIES

Standard General: To AS/NZS 4386.1.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

116

September 2011

Melrose specification

Joinery

Plinths Carcasses Material: Select from the following: - Overlaid high moisture resistant particleboard. - Overlaid high moisture resistant medium density fibreboard. Thickness: 16 mm. Joints: Select from the following: - Proprietary mechanical connections. - Dowels and glue. - Screws and glue. - Proprietary joining plates and glue. Adjustable shelves: Support on proprietary pins in holes bored at equal centres vertically. - Spacing: 32 mm. Finish: White melamine Fasteners: Conceal with finish. Installation: Secure to walls at not more than 600 mm centres. Drawer fronts and doors Material: Select from the following: - Melamine overlaid high moisture resistant particleboard. - Melamine overlaid high moisture resistant medium density fibreboard. Thickness: 16 mm. Maximum door size: 2400 mm high, 900 mm wide, 1.5 m2 on face. Drawer fronts: Rout for drawer bottoms. Drawer backs and sides Material: PVC film wrapped particleboard. Thickness: 12 mm. Installation: Mitre corners leaving outer skin of foil intact, finish with butt joints, glue to form carcass and screw to drawer front. Rout for drawer bottoms. Drawer bottoms Material: PVC film laminated hardboard. Thickness: 3 mm. Drawer and door hardware Hinge types: Concealed metal hinges with the following features: - Adjustable for height, side and depth location of door. - Nickel plated. Piano hinges: Chrome plated steel, extending full height of doors. Slides: Metal runners and plastic rollers with the following features: - 30 kg loading capacity. - Closure retention. - White thermoset powder coating or nickel plated. Full height doors Refer to drawings 2.4 WORKING SURFACES

Laminated benchtops Finish: High-pressure decorative laminated sheet, refer to drawings Exposed edges: Extend laminate over shaped nosing, finishing > 50 mm back on underside. Splay outside corners at 45. Balance underside: Extend laminate to the undersides of benchtops. Installation: Scribe to walls. Fix to carcass at least twice per 600 mm length of benchtop. Joint sealing: Fill joint with sealant matching finish and clamp with proprietary mechanical connectors.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 117 September 2011

Melrose specification

Joinery

Stone benchtops Material: Refer to drawings Balance underside: Laminate undersides of benchtops. 3 3.1 EXECUTION JOINERY

General Joints: Provide materials in single lengths whenever possible. If joints are necessary make them over supports. Framing: Frame and trim where necessary for openings, including those required by other trades. Accessories and trim General: Provide accessories and trim necessary to complete the installation. Fasteners Visibility: Do not provide visible fixings except in the following locations: - Inside cupboards and drawer units. - Inside open units in which case provide proprietary caps to conceal fixings. Visible fixings: Where fastenings are unavoidable on visible joinery faces, sink the heads below the surface and fill the sinking flush with a material compatible with the surface finish. In surfaces which are to have clear or tinted finish provide matching wood plugs showing face (not end) grain. In surfaces which are to have melamine finish provide proprietary screws and caps finished to match. Fix joinery units to backgrounds as follows: - Floor mounted units: 600 mm centres max. - Wall mounted units: To each nogging and/or stud stiffener. Fixings: Screws with washers into timber or steel framing, or masonry anchors. Adhesives General: Provide adhesives to transmit the loads imposed and to ensure the rigidity of the assembly, without causing discolouration of finished surfaces. Finishing Junctions with structure: Scribe, plinths, benchtops, splashbacks, ends of cupboards, kickboards and returns to follow the line of structure. Joints: Scribe internal and mitre external joints. Edge strips: Finish exposed edges of sheets with edge strips which match sheet faces. Matching: For surfaces which are to have clear or tinted finish, arrange adjacent pieces to match the grain and colour. Hygiene requirements: To all food handling areas and voids at the backs of units to all areas, seal all carcass junctions with walls and floors, and to cable entries, with silicone beads for vermin proofing. Apply water resistant sealants around all plumbing fixtures and ensure the sealants are fit for purpose. Benchtops Installation: Fix to carcass at least twice per 600 mm length of benchtop. Joint sealing: Fill joints with sealant matching the finish colour and clamp with proprietary mechanical connectors. Edge sealing: Seal to walls and carcasses with a sealant, which matches the finish colour. Splash backs Glass: Fix with non-acidic silicone adhesive. Apply at the rate recommended by the manufacturer. Installation: Clean the back of the glass panel and apply 'wallnuts' of adhesive together with double sided adhesive tape for temporary support, and affix directly to the substrate. Labelling General: Permanently mark each unit of furniture with the manufacturer's name, on an interior surface.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

118

September 2011

Melrose specification

Joinery

3.2

DELIVERY AND STORAGE

General General: Deliver joinery units to site in unbroken wrapping or containers and store so that its moisture content is not adversely affected. Do not store in areas of wet plaster. Keep storage to a minimum by delivering items only when required for installation. Concealed surfaces: Prime surfaces concealed by backgrounds. Deficiencies: Examine joinery units for completeness and remedy deficiencies. Acclimatisation General: Acclimatise the joinery items by stacking it in the in-service conditions with air circulation to all surfaces after the following construction operations are complete: - Air conditioning operational. - Lighting operational. - Site drainage and stormwater works are complete. - Space fully enclosed and secure. - Wet work complete and dry. Background General: Damp clean and vacuum background surfaces that will be permanently concealed. 3.3 COMPLETION

Maintenance manual General: Submit manufacturers published recommendations for service use. Cleaning Temporary coatings: On or before completion of the works, or before joining up to other surfaces, remove all traces of temporary coatings used as a means of protection. General: Remove all dust, marks and rubbish from all surfaces and internal spaces. Clean and polish all self finished surfaces such as anodised and powdercoated metals, sanitaryware, glass, tiles and laminates.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

119

September 2011

Melrose specification

Waterproofing wet areas

WATERPROOFING WET AREAS

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide wet area waterproofing systems which: - Are graded to floor wastes to dispose of water without ponding. - Prevent moisture entering the substrate or adjacent areas. Selections: As documented. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. 1.3 STANDARDS

Wet areas Standard: To AS 3740. 1.4 INTERPRETATIONS

Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the definitions given in AS 3740and the following apply: - Substrates: The surface to which a material or product is applied. - Bond breaker: A system preventing a membrane bonding to the substrate, bedding or lining. - Membranes: Impervious barriers to liquid water which may be: . Installed below floor finishes. . Installed behind the wall sheeting or render and termed External. . Installed to the face of the wall sheeting or render and termed Internal. . Liquid applied in liquid or gel form and air cured to form a seamless film. . Sheet in sheet form with joints lapped and sealed. - Preformed shower base: A preformed, prefinished vessel (including integral upstands) installed as the finished floor of a shower compartment, and provided with a connection point to a sanitary drainage system. - Shower tray: An internal or external liquid or sheet membrane system used to waterproof the floor and the wall/floor junctions of a shower area. - Waterproof (WP): The property of a material that does not allow moisture to penetrate through it. - Waterproofing systems: Combinations of membranes, flashings, drainage and accessories which form waterproof barriers and which may be: . Loose-laid. . Bonded to substrates. - Water resistant (WR): The property of a material that restricts moisture movement and will not degrade under conditions of moisture. - Wet area: An area within a building supplied with a floor waste. 1.5 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so inspection may be made of the following: - Substrate preparation completed. - Secondary layers preparation completed. - Before membranes are covered up or concealed.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

120

September 2011

Melrose specification

Waterproofing wet areas

1.6

SUBMISSIONS

Shop drawings Submit shop drawings showing: - Junctions with vertical surfaces and upstands. - Junctions at perimeters. - Drainage details. - Control joints. - Flashings. - Penetrations. - Corners. - Terminations and connections. Execution records Placing records: Photographically record the application of membranes and information as follows: - Date. - Portion of work. - Substrate preparation. - Protection provided from traffic. For large or complex projects consider adding the following requirement: - Personnel: Employ a suitably qualified person to monitor the placing and protection of the membrane and prepare a daily report. Samples General: Submit 300 x 300 mm samples of each type of membrane. Products documentation General: Submit copies of product manufacturers: - Product technical data sheets. - Material safety data sheets (MSDS). - Type tests certificates verifying conformance to AS/NZS 4858. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS PRODUCTS

Membranes Standard: To AS/NZS 4858. Membrane systems Requirement: Proprietary membrane systems having one of the following certifying that the system is suitable for the intended wet area waterproofing, as follows: - Certificate: Provide certificate on completion e.g. a current BRANZ Appraisal Certificate. Delete whole subclause if a proprietary membrane is documented but check for appraisal documentation. Shower tray General: Purpose-made jointless shower tray, with wall upstands at least 50 mm higher than the hob upstands. Set hob masonry on the inside of the tray upstands. Water stop angles Material: Rigid, corrosion resistant angles compatible with the waterproof membrane system. Bond breakers Requirement: Compatible with the flexibility class of the membrane to be used. Material: Purpose made bond breaker tapes and closed cell foam backing rods or fillets of sealant. Flashings Requirement: Flexible waterproof flashings compatible with the waterproof membrane system. Liquid membrane reinforcement Requirement: Flexible fabric compatible with the waterproof membrane system.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 121 September 2011

Melrose specification

Waterproofing wet areas

Sealants Requirement: Waterproof, flexible, mould-resistant and compatible with host materials. Adhesives Requirement: Waterproof and compatible with host materials. 3 3.1 EXECUTION PREPARATION

Substrates General: Make sure substrates are as follows: - Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion of membranes. - If walls are plastered, remove loose sand. - If walls or floors are framed or discontinuous, support members are in full lengths without splicing. - If floors are solid or continuous: . Excessive projections are removed. . Voids and hollows > 10 mm with abrupt edges are filled with a cement:sand mix not stronger than the substrate nor weaker than the bedding. . Depressions < 10 mm are filled with a latex modified cementitious product with feathering eliminated by scabbling the edges. . Cracks in substrates wider than 1.5 mm are filled with a filler compatible with the membrane system. External corners: Round or arris edges. Moisture content Concrete substrates: Cure for > 21 days. Moisture content: Verify that the moisture content of the substrate is compatible with the water vapour transmission rate of the membrane system by testing to AS/NZS 2455.1 Appendix B. Test type: - Hygrometer test: Seal a hygrometer to the substrate for > 16 hours and measure the relative humidity of the air between the instrument and the slab. - Electrical resistance test: Connect a resistance meter to the slab and read the moisture content. Falls Substrate: If the membrane is directly under the floor finish ensure the fall in the substrate conforms to the fall nominated for the finish. Sheet substrate fastening Requirement: Fasten or adequately fix to the supporting structure. Control joints Finishes: Align control joints in finishes and bedding with control joints or changes in materials in the substrate. Water stop angles Requirement: Provide water stop angles at door thresholds and shower enclosures to support the waterproof membrane at junctions between waterproofed and non-waterproofed areas. Sizing: Size the vertical leg of the water stop angle to conform to the requirements of AS 3740. Corners: Cut the horizontal leg and bend the vertical leg at corners instead of forming vertical joints between separate lengths of angle. Fixing: Fix water stop angles to the substrate with compatible sealant or adhesive and corrosionresistant countersunk or wafer head screws. Priming General: If required by the membrane manufacturer, prime the substrates with a primer compatible with the membrane system. Bond breakers Requirement: After the priming of surfaces, provide bond breakers at all wall/floor, hob/wall junctions and at control joints where the membrane is bonded to the substrate. Sealant fillet bond breakers:
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 122 September 2011

Melrose specification

Waterproofing wet areas

- Application: Form a triangular fillet or cove of sealant to internal corners within the period recommended by the membrane manufacturer after the application of the primer. - Widths: 5 mm x 5 mm to vertical corners. 6 mm x 6 mm 9 mm x 9 mm to horizontal corners. Backing rod bond breakers: Retain in position with continuous length of tape pressed firmly in place against the surfaces on each side of the rod. 3.2 APPLICATION

Protection General: Protect membrane from damage during installation and for the period after installation until the membrane achieves its service characteristics that resist damage. Extent of waterproofing Waterproof or water resistant surfaces: To the requirements of BCA 3.8.1.2. Sheet membrane joints Bituminous sheet membranes: - Side laps > 75 mm. - End laps > 100 mm. Synthetic rubber membranes: - Factory-vulcanized laps > 40 mm. - Field side laps > 50 mm for side laps. - Field end-laps > 100 mm for end laps. PVC membranes: - Factory welded laps > 30 mm. - Fieldwelded laps > 75 mm. Vertical membrane terminations Upstands: At least 150 mm above the finished tile level of the floor or 25 mm above the maximum retained water level, whichever is the greater. Anchoring: Secure sheet membranes along the top edge. Edge protection: Protect edges of the membrane. Flashings Junctions between waterproof surfaces: Provide a bond breaker at internal corners behind flashings. Junctions between waterproof surfaces and other surfaces: Provide a bead of sealant at the following junctions: - Waterproof and water-resistant surfaces. - Water-resistant and water-resistant surfaces. - Water-resistant and non water-resistant surfaces. Perimeter flashings: Provide continuous flashings to the full perimeter of waterproof areas at wall/floor junctions and to water stop angles. Vertical flashings: Provide vertical corner flashings continuous across wall/wall junctions to at least 1800 mm above finished floor level. Vertical liquid applied flashings: - Return legs at least 40 mm on each wall. - Overlap the vertical termination of the floor waterproofing membrane at least 20 mm. Vertical sheet flashings: - Return legs at least 50 mm on each wall. - Overlap shower tray upstands at least 50 mm. - Do not penetrate flashing with wall lining fasteners. Reinforcement: At coves, corners and wall/floor junctions with gaps greater than 3 mm reinforce liquid applied membranes with reinforcement fabric tape recommended by the membrane manufacturer. Fold the tape in half lengthways and imbed it in the first flashing coat of membrane with one half of the tape on each side of the corner or joint. Apply a second coat of liquid membrane to seal the fabric.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

123

September 2011

Melrose specification

Waterproofing wet areas

Doorjambs and architraves Requirement: Where the bottom of doorjambs and architraves do not finish above the floor tiling, waterproof their surfaces below tile level to provide a continuous seal between the perimeter flashing to the wall/floor junction and the water stop angle. Drainage connections Floor wastes: Provide floor wastes of sufficient height to accommodate the thickness of floor finishes and bedding at the outlet position. Position drainage flange to drain at membrane level. Turn membrane down 50 mm minimum into the floor waste drainage flanges, and adhere to form a waterproof connection. Floor wastes in shower trays: Provide drainage of the tile bed and a waterproof connection between the tray and the drain. Preformed drainage channels with continuous drainage flanges: Provide a continuous waterproof connection between the membrane and the channel. Preformed drainage channels without drainage flanges: Provide continuous waterproofing under the channel and terminate the membrane at a floor waste with a recessed drainage flange. Enclosed showers with hobs General: Construct from masonry, concrete or corrosion-resistant metal. Fix securely to the floor, seal against walls and make flush all gaps, joints and intersections prior to application of the membrane. Autoclaved aerated concrete hobs: Do not use for external membrane systems. Prime prior to the application of the membrane. Internal membranes: Extend membrane over the hob and into the room at least 50 mm. External membranes (hob located inside membrane tray): Dress membrane up outside of hob and finish at the underside of tiles capping the top of the hob. Enclosed showers with step-downs Levels: Conform to AS 3740 Figure 3.5 and as follows: - Finish the highest level of the shower area at a level at least 15 mm below the finished floor level outside the shower. - Extend the membrane at least 10 mm above the maximum retained water level in the area outside the shower or 150 mm above the finished floor level of the shower area, whichever is the greater. With framed shower screens: Terminate the membrane directly below the floor tiles below the shower screen sill mounted on the upper level of the step-down. Support and adhere the membrane to a water stop angle fixed securely to the upper level substrate. With frameless shower screens: Install the shower screen with the inside face flush with the stepdown. Terminate the membrane outside the shower screen at least 1500 mm from the shower rose outlet on the wall. Support and adhere the membrane to a water stop angle fixed securely to the substrate. Finish membrane flush with the underside of tiles. Enclosed hobless showers with framed shower screens Requirement: Conform to AS 3740 Figure 3.6 and as follows: - Turn the membrane up against a water stop angle fixed securely to the substrate directly below the shower screen sill. - Size the angle so that the vertical leg finishes at least 5 mm above the level of the tiles. Support and adhere the membrane to the angle and finish it flush with the top of the vertical leg. Enclosed hobless showers with trench drain located below screen With framed or frameless shower screens: Install a water stop angle where the outer edge of the trench drain to the perimeter of the shower will be installed. Size the angle so that the vertical leg finishes at the underside of the tiles. Support and adhere the membrane over the water stop angle and terminate the membrane at floor wastes as described in Drainage connections. Install the trench drain with the shower screen located vertically above it. Unenclosed showers Requirement: Extend membrane at least 1500 mm into the room from the shower rose outlet on the wall. Preformed shower bases Support: Fully support shower bases without causing distortion or cracking. Junction with walls for bases with integral perimeter upstands: Conform to AS 3740 Figure 3.1 and as follows:
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 124 September 2011

Melrose specification

Waterproofing wet areas

- Recess shower base into walls or batten off wall lining sufficiently to allow water-resistant wall finishes to overlap the integral upstands along the top edge of the shower base. - Maintain the structural integrity of walls that are rebated. Baths and spas Junction of walls with baths: Conform to AS 3740 Figure 3.2 and as follows: - Baths with integral upstands: Recess bath edges into walls or batten off wall lining sufficiently to allow water-resistant wall finishes to overlap the baths integral perimeter upstands. Maintain the structural integrity of walls that are rebated. - Baths without integral upstands or with showers over rendered masonry walls: Form or chase a rebate in the render to receive the bath edge. Waterproof the wall above and below the rebate, including the rebate, and the floor area under the bath. Seal the edge of the bath into the rebate. - Baths without integral upstands or with showers over framed and lined walls: Form a rebate in the wall lining with a corrosion-resistant lipped channel to receive the bath edge. Waterproof the wall above and below the rebate, including the rebate, and the floor area under the bath. Seal the edge of the bath into the rebate. Plinth-mounted insert baths and spas: Conform to AS 3740 Figure 3.2 and as follows: - Line framed enclosures for insert baths. - Form an upstand on the inside edge of the enclosure opening to receive the bath with an angle or compressible foam rod. - Waterproof walls abutting the enclosure, the top of the plinth and the interior and exterior of the enclosure. - After tiling the walls, outside of the enclosure and plinth top, install the bath with its downturn edge lip outside the upstand formed on the edge of the opening and seal the lip to the tiles. Taps and spouts Requirement: Waterproof penetrations for taps and spouts with proprietary flange systems or a sealant. Provision for servicing: Install taps in a manner that allows tap washers or ceramic discs to be serviced without damaging the waterproofing seal. Recessed soap holders Construction: Support all faces of the recess and line with the same sheet material as the adjacent wall. Fall base of recess towards the shower area. Flash all junctions and waterproof all surfaces. Membrane horizontal penetrations Sleeves: Provide a flexible flange for all penetrations, bonded to the penetration and to the membrane. Membrane vertical penetrations Pipes, ducts, and vents: Provide separate sleeves for all pipes, ducts, and vents and have fixed to the substrate. Curing of liquid applied systems General: To the manufacturers instructions. Curing: Allow membrane to fully cure before tiling. Overlaying finishes on membranes Requirement: Protect waterproof membranes with compatible water-resistant surface materials that do not cause damage to the membrane. Suitable materials: Conform to AS 3740. Bonded or partially bonded systems: If the topping or bedding mortar is required to be bonded to the membrane, provide sufficient control joints in the topping or bedding mortar to reduce the movement over the membrane. 3.3 FLOOD TEST

General Application: Perform a flood test before the installation of surface finishes. Moisture measurement method: Conform to AS/NZS 2455.1 Appendix B. Set-up: - Measure the wall/floor junction of adjacent spaces and the floor soffit below for dryness. - Record the result for each area.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 125 September 2011

Melrose specification

Waterproofing wet areas

- Dam the doorway(s) and seal floor wastes and drainage outlets to allow 50 mm water level. - Fill space with clean water and leave overnight. Evaluation: - Make a visual inspection of the wall/floor junction of adjacent spaces and of the floor soffit below for obvious water or moisture. - Test the same areas for dryness and compare the results to the measurements taken prior to flooding. Compliance: - Evidence of water from the visual test: Failure. - No visual evidence of water: Proceed with moisture measurements. - Test results indicating an increase in moisture before and after flooding: Failure. Records: - Submit records of all flood tests. 3.4 COMPLETION

Protection General: Keep traffic off membrane surfaces until bonding has set or for 24 hours after laying, whichever period is the longer. Reinstatement: Repair or replace faulty or damaged work. If the work cannot be repaired satisfactorily, replace the whole area affected. Warranty Waterproofing: Cover materials and workmanship in the terms of the warranty in the form of interlocking warranties from the supplier and the applicator. - Form: Against failure of materials and execution under normal environment and use conditions. - Period: As offered by the supplier.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

126

September 2011

Melrose specification

Ceramic tiling

CERAMIC TILING

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide tiling systems to walls, floors and other substrates as follows and/or to the SELECTIONS: - Consistent in colour and finish. - Firmly bonded to substrates for the expected life of the installation. - Set out with joints accurately aligned in both directions and wall tiling joints level and plumb. - To direct all water flowing from supply points to drainage outlets without leakage to the substrate or adjacent areas. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. 1.3 STANDARDS

Tiling General: Comply with the recommendations of those parts of AS 3958.1 which are referenced in this worksection. Slip resistance Classification: To AS/NZS 4586 for the classifications noted in SELECTIONS. Slip resistance measurement of existing installations: To AS/NZS 4663. 1.4 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Substrate immediately before tiling. - Trial set-outs before execution. - Control joints before sealing and grouting. - Grout and sealant colours before application. 1.5 SUBMISSIONS

Samples General: Submit labelled samples of tiles, including fittings, accessories, grout and sealants, illustrating the range of variation in colour and finish. 1.6 TESTS

General Tests: Submit tests as follows: - Type test slip resistance of tiles to AS/NZS 4586. - Site slip resistance test of completed surface to AS/NZS 4663. 1.7 TOLERANCES

Completed tiling Standard: To AS 3958.1 clause 5.4.6.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

127

September 2011

Melrose specification

Ceramic tiling

2 2.1

PRODUCTS MARKING

Identification General: Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturers original sealed containers legibly marked to show the following: - Manufacturers identification. - Product brand name. - Product type. - Dimensions and quantity. - Product reference code and batch number. - Date of manufacture. - Material composition and characteristics such as volatility, flash point, light fastness, colour and pattern. - Handling and installation instructions. 2.2 UNDERLAY

Compressed fibre cement Product: HardiePanel or similar 2.3 TILES AND ACCESSORIES

Tiles Standard: To AS 4662. Tactile ground surface indicators: To AS/NZS 1428.4.1. Coves, nosings and skirtings: Provide matching stop-end and internal and external angle tiles moulded for that purpose. Exposed edges: Purpose-made border tiles with the exposed edge (whether round, square or cushion) glazed to match the tile face. If such tiles are not available, mitre tiles on external corners. Accessories General: Provide tile accessories to the Accessories schedule which match the composition, colour and finish of the surrounding tiles. 2.4 ADHESIVES

General Standard: To AS 2358 and AS 4992.1. Type General: Provide adhesives to the Wall tiling schedule and to the Floor tiling schedule and compatible with the materials and surfaces to be adhered. Prohibited uses: Do not provide the following combinations: - Cement-based adhesives on wood, metal, painted or glazed surfaces, gypsum-based plaster. - Organic solvent-based adhesives on painted surfaces. - Organic PVC-based adhesives and organic natural rubber latex adhesives in damp or wet conditions. - PVA (polyvinyl acetate) based adhesives in wet areas or externally. 2.5 MORTAR

Materials Cement type to AS 3972: GP. - White cement: Iron salts content 1%. - Off-white cement: Iron salts content 2.5%. Lime: To AS 1672.1. Sand: Fine aggregate with a low clay content selected for grading, sharp and free from efflorescing salts.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

128

September 2011

Melrose specification

Ceramic tiling

Measurement of volume: Measure binders and sand by volume using buckets or boxes. Do not allow sand to bulk by absorption of water. Bedding mortar Proportioning: Select proportions from the range 1:3 1:4 cement:sand (by volume) to obtain satisfactory adhesion. Provide minimum water. Terra cotta tiles: Use proprietary polymer modified mortar. Mixing: To AS 3958.1 clause 2.15. Water General: Clean and free from any deleterious matter. 2.6 GROUT

Type Cement based proprietary grout: Mix with water. Fine sand may be added as a filler in wider joints. Terra cotta tiles: Use proprietary polymer modified grout. Portland cement based grout: Mix with fine sand. Provide minimum water consistent with workability. - For joints < 3 mm: 1 cement:2 sand (by volume). - For joints 3 mm: 1 cement:3 sand (by volume). Pigments Pigments for coloured grout: Provide colourfast fillers compatible with the grout material. For cementbased grouts, provide lime-proof natural or synthetic metallic oxides compatible with cement. 2.7 CONTROL JOINTS

Control joint materials Control joint strip: A proprietary expansion joint consisting of a neoprene filler sandwiched between plates with lugs or ribs for mechanical keying. Set flush with the finished surface. Proprietary slide plate divider strip: An arrangement of interlocking metal plates grouted into pockets formed in the concrete joint edges. Sealant: One-part self-levelling non-hardening mould resistant, silicone or polyurethane sealant applied over a backing rod. Finish flush with the finished surface. - Floors: Trafficable, shore hardness > 35. Backing rod: Compressible closed cell polyethylene foam with a bond-breaking surface. 3 3.1 EXECUTION SUBSTRATES

Drying and shrinkage General: Before tiling, allow at least the following times to elapse (for initial drying out and shrinkage) for these substrates: - Concrete slabs: 42 days. - Concrete blockwork: 28 days. - Toppings on slabs and rendering on brick or blockwork: A further 21 days. - Rendering on swimming pool shell: A further 28 days minimum. 3.2 PREPARATION

Standard Preparation: To AS 3958.1 Section 4. Ambient temperature General: If the ambient temperature is < 5 or > 35C, do not lay tiles. Substrates without wet area membranes General: Ensure substrates are as follows: - Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location of tiles. - If framed or discontinuous, support members are in full lengths without splicing. - If solid or continuous: . Excessive projections are removed.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 129 September 2011

Melrose specification

Ceramic tiling

. Voids and hollows > 10 mm with abrupt edges are filled with a cement:sand mix not stronger than the substrate or weaker than the bedding. . Depressions < 10 mm are filled with a latex modified cementitious product with feathering eliminated by scabbling the edges. Absorbent substrates: If suction is excessive, control it by dampening but avoid over-wetting and do not apply mortar bedding to substrates showing surface moisture. Dense concrete: If not sufficiently rough to provide a mechanical key, roughen by scabbling or the like to remove 3 mm of the surface and expose the aggregate; then apply a bonding treatment. Substrates with wet area membranes General: Ensure substrates are as follows: - Clean and free of any deposit or finish which may impair adhesion or location of tiles. - Compatible with all components of the floor system. 3.3 FIXING UNDERLAY

Underlay fixed on joists Installation: Lay the length of the sheets at right angles to the supports. Stagger the end joints and locate them centrally over joists. If panels are not tongue and grooved provide noggings or trimmer joists to support the edges. Fixing centres: Maximum 300 mm on each support. - Fibre-cement flooring: Fix sheeting to the supports with adhesive and non-corrosive countersunk screws. Fill the screw holes with sealant before fixing. After fixing, stop the screw heads with the same sealant, finished slightly below the sheet surface. - Particleboard and plywood flooring: Fix sheeting to the supports with adhesive and nail. Membranes: If sheet flooring is the substrate for a wet area membrane, fix with stainless steel countersunk head screws. 3.4 TILING GENERALLY

Sequence General: Fix wall tiles before floor tiles. Cutting and laying Cutting: Cut tiles neatly to fit around fixtures and fittings and at margins where necessary. Drill holes without damaging tile faces. Cut recesses for fittings such as soap holders. Rub edges smooth without chipping. Laying: Return tiles into sills, reveals and openings. Butt up to returns, frames, fittings, and other finishes. Strike and point up beds where exposed. Remove tile spacers before grouting. Variations General: Distribute variations in hue, colour, or pattern uniformly, by mixing tiles or tile batches before laying. Protection Floor tiles: Keep traffic off floor tiles until the bedding has set and attained its working strength. Cleaning: Keep the work clean as it proceeds and protect finished work from damage. Floor finish dividers General: Finish tiled floors at junctions with differing floor finishes with a corrosion-resistant metal dividing strip fixed to the substrate. If changes of floor finish occur at doorways, make the junction directly below the closed door. Bath ventilation General: Ventilate the space below fully enclosed baths with at least 2 vermin proofed ventilating tiles. 3.5 SETTING OUT

Tile joints Joint widths: Set out tiles to give uniform joint widths within the following limits: - Floors: . Dry pressed tiles: 3 mm. . Extruded tiles: 6 mm. . Vitrified: 3 to 5 mm.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 130 September 2011

Melrose specification

Ceramic tiling

. Quarry tiles: 6 to 12 mm. . Chemical resistant epoxy jointed tiling: 5 to 6 mm. - Large and/or irregular floor tiles: 6 to 12 mm. - Mounted mosaics: To match mounting pattern. - Walls: . Dry pressed tile: 1.5 mm. . Extruded tile: 6 mm. Joint alignment: Set out tiling with joints accurately aligned in both directions and wall tiling joints level and plumb. Joint position: Set out tiles from the centre of the floor or wall to be tiled. Margins General: Provide whole or purpose-made tiles at margins where practicable, otherwise set out to give equal margins of cut tiles. If margins less than half tile width are unavoidable, locate the cut tiles where they are least conspicuous. Fixtures General: If possible position tiles so that holes for fixtures and other penetrations occur at the intersection of horizontal and vertical joints or on the centre lines of tiles. Continue tiling fully behind fixtures which are not built in to the tiling surface. Before tiling ensure that fixtures interrupting the tile surfaces are accurately positioned in their designed or optimum locations relative to the tile layout. 3.6 FALLS AND LEVELS

Grading General: Grade floor tiling to even and correct falls to floor wastes and elsewhere as required. Make level junctions with walls. Where falls are not required lay level. Fall, general: 1:100 minimum. Fall, in shower areas: 1:60 minimum. Change of finish: Maintain finished floor level across changes of floor finish including carpet. 3.7 BEDDING

Standard Cement mortar: To AS 3958.1 clause 5.5. Adhesive: To AS 3958.1 clause 5.6. Preparation of tiles Adhesive bedding: Fix tiles dry; do not soak. Mortar bedding: Soak porous tiles in water for half an hour and then drain until the surface water has disappeared. Terra cotta tiles: Use pre-sealed tiles or apply a breathable sealer and lay dry. If a final sealed finish is selected, use a compatible laying sealer. Bedding General: Use bedding methods and materials which are appropriate to the tile, the substrate, the conditions of service, and which leave the tile firmly and solidly bedded in the bedding material and adhered to the substrate. Form falls integral with the substrate. Thin adhesive beds General: Provide only if the substrate deviation is less than 3 mm when tested with a 3 m straight edge. Cover the entire tile back with adhesive when the tile is bedded. Thickness: 1.5 3 mm. Thick adhesive beds General: Provide on substrates with deviations up to 6 mm when tested with a 3 m straight edge, and with tiles having deep keys or frogs. Nominal thickness: 6 mm. Adhesive bedding application General: Apply adhesive by notched trowel to walls and floors and direct to tiles if required, to provide evenly distributed coverage after laying as follows: - Domestic internal walls: > 65%.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 131 September 2011

Melrose specification

Ceramic tiling

- Domestic internal floors: > 80%. - Other wall and floors: > 90%. - Wet areas and bench tops: 100%. Pattern of distribution of adhesive: As described in AS 3958.1 clause 5.6.4.3. Verify by examining one tile in ten as work proceeds. Wall tile spacers: Do not use spacer types that inhibit the distribution of adhesive. Curing: Allow the adhesive to cure for the period nominated by the manufacturer prior to grouting or allowing foot traffic. Mortar beds For floor tiles: Either lightly dust the screeded bed surface with dry cement and trowel level until the cement is damp, or spread a thin slurry of neat cement, or cement-based thin bed adhesive, on to the tile back. Do not provide mortar after initial set has occurred. - Nominal thickness: 20 to 40 mm. Thick reinforced beds: Place mortar bed in two layers, and incorporate the mesh reinforcement in the first layer. 3.8 CONTROL OF MOVEMENT

General General: Provide control joints carried through the tile and the bedding to AS 3958.1 clause 5.4.5, the Control joints schedule and as follows: - Floor location: . Over structural control joints. . To divide complex room plans into rectangles. . Around the perimeter of the floor. . At junctions between different substrates. . To divide large tiled areas into bays. . At abutments with the building structural frame and over supporting walls or beams where flexing of the substrate is anticipated. - Depth of joint: Right through to the substrate. - Sealant width: 6 25 mm. 3.9 GROUTED AND SEALANT JOINTS

Grouted joints General: Commence grouting as soon as practicable after bedding has set. Clean out joints as necessary before grouting. Face grouting: Fill the joints solid and tool flush. Clean off surplus grout. Wash down when the grout has set. When grout is dry, polish the surface with a clean cloth. Edges of tiles: Grout exposed edge joints. Epoxy grouted joints: Ensure that tile edge surfaces are free of extraneous matter such as cement films or wax, before grouting. Mosaic tiles Grouting mosaics: If paper faced mosaics are to be bedded in cement mortar, pre-grout the sheeted mosaics from the back before fixing. After fixing, rub grout into the surface of the joints to fill any voids left from pre-grouting. Clean off surplus grout. When grout has set, wash down. If necessary use a proprietary cement remover. Sealant joints General: Provide joints filled with sealant and finished flush with the tile surface as follows: - Where tiling is cut around sanitary fixtures. - At corners of walls in showers. - Around fixtures interrupting the tile surface, for example pipes, brackets, bolts and nibs. - At junctions with elements such as window and door frames and built-in cupboards. Material: Anti-fungal modified silicone. Width: 5 mm.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 132 September 2011

Melrose specification

Ceramic tiling

Depth: Equal to the tile thickness. 3.10 JOINT ACCESSORIES Floor finish dividers General: Finish tiled floors at junctions with differing floor finishes with a corrosion resistant metal dividing strip suitably fixed to the substrate, with top edge flush with the finished floor. Where changes of floor finish occur at doorways make the junction directly below the closed door. Type: ribbed brass strip Stepping: Less than 5 mm. Adjustments If the floor finish divider was installed by the wet area waterproof membrane applicator check that the height is sufficient for the topping and tile thickness. Adjust as required with a matching flat bar adhesive fixed to the divider angle. Weather bars General: Provide a corrosion resistant metal weather bar under hinged external doors including to enclosed balconies. Locate under the centres of closed doors. 3.11 COMPLETION Spare tiles General: Supply spare matching tiles and accessories of each type for future replacement purposes. Store the spare materials on site. Quantity: At least 1% of the quantity installed. Cleaning General: Clean tiled surfaces using an appropriate tile cleaning agent, and polish. Operation and maintenance manuals General: Submit a manual describing care and maintenance of the tiling, including procedures for maintaining the slip-resistance grading stating the expected life of the slip-resistance grade. 4 SELECTIONS

Refer to interior finished schedule for selections

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

133

September 2011

Melrose specification

Floor sanding and finishing

FLOOR SANDING AND FINISHING

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General Basic sanded surface: Provide as follows: - To an even plane. - Free of irregularities. - Suitable for finish sanding. - As a suitable substrate for a carpet finish. - As a suitable key for an adhesive fixed resilient finish. Finish sanded surface: Provide as follows: - As a suitable key for an applied coating system. - That will result in a clear finished surface free of scratch marks when observed standing. Coating system: Provide as follows and/or to the Selections: - Of a consistent film thickness throughout the surface. - Of a consistent level of gloss. - Without edge bonding. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. 1.3 INTERPRETATION

Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply: - Basic sanding: Sanding procedures resulting in an even plane surface free of irregularities. - Finish sanding: Sanding procedures resulting in a surface suitable for the application of the coating system. - Coating system: Applied materials to enhance wear and protect the flooring material. - Flooring: . Hard flooring: Timber with a wearing surface not easily cut with an abrasive. . Mild flooring: Timber with a wearing surface easily cut with an abrasive. - Filling: Treatment to enhance the surface appearance by: . Flood filling: To fill the pores of open-grained timber or minor cracks in parquetry. . Stopping: To fill punched nail head cavities. - Staining: Treatment to alter the colour of the timber surface. - Sealing: Treatment to: . Prevent excessive penetration of coating system. . Prevent edge bonding by the coating system. - Edge bonding: The tendency of some coating systems to glue the edges of strip flooring and parquetry panels which prevents an even distribution of movement gaps. 1.4 STANDARD

Floor sanding and finishing General: To AS 4786.2.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

134

September 2011

Melrose specification

Floor sanding and finishing

1.5

INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Before surface preparation of timber. - Completion of finish sanding. - After staining. - After application of each clear finishing coat. 1.6 SUBMISSIONS

Samples General: Submit samples of the coating system illustrating the finished effect on the selected floor surface in accordance with the Samples table. Samples table Item Sample size Number All finishes 2x floor boards 1 sample per finish

Product conformity General: Submit current assessments of conformity as follows: - Declaration of conformity by an AS/NZS ISO 9001 quality management system certified supplier to the requirements of Appendix I Uniform Paint Standard to the Standard for the Uniform Scheduling of Drugs and Poisons (SUSDP). Application of coating systems General: Submit proposals. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS ABRASIVES

Grades General: Select abrasives in accordance with the Abrasives table. Abrasives table Floor hardness Basic sanding Finish sanding Initial cuts Final sand Hard Mild Soft F24 to F30 F36 to F40 F60 to F80 F40 to F60 F60 to F80 F80 to F100 if necessary F80 to F120 F100 to F120 F120

Sanding between finish coats of coating system F150 or finer F150 or finer F150 or finer

Scratching: If scratching persists during the final sanding re-sand with a finer grade of abrasive. 2.2 FINISH

Filler General: Non-oil based and compatible with the coating system. Coating system Type: Provide the coating system nominated in Selections. Quality: Provide premium quality lines. Combinations: - Do not combine clear finishes from different manufacturers in a coating system. - Provide only the combinations of filler, stain and sealer recommended by the manufacturer of the top coats. Delivery: Deliver all products to the site in the manufacturers labelled and unopened containers.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

135

September 2011

Melrose specification

Floor sanding and finishing

3 3.1

EXECUTION PREPARATION

Sanding procedure General: Provide sanding procedure as follows: Floor type Proposed use of floor surface As flooring substrate New floor Existing floor poor condition Existing floor good condition Basic sanding Basic sanding

As a finished surface? Basic sanding and finish sanding Basic sanding and finish sanding Finish sand only

Lighting General: Provide supplementary lighting to allow close examination of the entire process. Substrate General: Do not commence sanding until: - Adhesives have cured. - Floor heating has been switched off for 48 hours. - Filler has dried as indicated by the colour fading. Before finishing: Make sure substrates are clean and free of any deposit which may impair the following: - Application of the coating system. - Adhesion of resilient finishes. Preparation General: Punch nails 3 mm below the surface. Remove tacks. Fill open grained timber with materials compatible with those used in subsequent finishing operations. 3.2 SANDING

Basic sanding general General: Remove irregularities caused by cupping or mismatching of the flooring materials, with a drum type sanding machine and coarse abrasives. Basic sanding strip flooring General: First cut at 45 to the length of the boards, second cut at 90 to the first cut, and third cut parallel to the length of the boards. Boundary areas: Bring to the same surface condition as the main sanded area, using disc sanding. Inaccessible areas: Hand scrape to produce an even, plane surface. Basic sanding parquet Uneven or hard flooring: First cut at 45 to the direction of the grain of the wood, second cut at 90 to the first cut, third cut at 45 to the first cut, and fourth cut at 90 to the third cut. Boundary areas: Bring to the same surface condition as the main sanded area, using disc sanding. Inaccessible areas: Hard scrape to produce an even, plane surface. Stopping and filling General: Select a colour to produce an average match with the final coated timber in tone, colour and texture. Fill minor cracks and stop punched nails with a putty knife. Fill deeper holes in layers > 6 mm allowing each fill to dry. Make sure cavities are filled slightly above the surface without air pockets. Flood fill porous timber with the cloth application of water based filler diluted to a creamy consistency. Finish sanding strip flooring General: After basic sanding, cut twice parallel to the length of the boards using increasingly fine abrasives. If hard surfaces show excessive scratching apply an initial cut at 90 to the grain direction.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 136 September 2011

Melrose specification

Floor sanding and finishing

Boundary areas: Bring to the same surface condition as the main sanded area, using disc sanding. Inaccessible areas: Hand scrape to produce the same surface condition as the main sanded area. Water based coating system: Sand with a final grade of paper of minimum F220 screen back. Finish sanding parquet General: After basic sanding, cut twice parallel to the fourth basic sanding cut, then cut twice again in that direction using increasingly fine abrasives. Boundary areas: Bring to the same surface condition as the main sanded area. Inaccessible areas: Hand scrape to produce the same surface condition as the main sanded area. Water based coating system: Sand with a final grade of paper of minimum F220 screen back. Cleaning General: After each sanding operation remove all dust by all of the following: - Removal from cracks by hand. - Vacuum cleaning. - Tack rag cleaning. 3.3 COATING SYSTEM

Wet paint warning General: Place notices conspicuously and do not remove them until the coating system has cured and hardened. Application General: Apply the coating system in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. Maintain a wet edge throughout the whole area. Sanding General: Fine sand between coats only within the depth of the finish, and remove dust. Finishing cork floors Requirement: After sanding, finish with 3 coats of clear sealer to AS 3730.27. Timber floor coating system Coating: If edge bonding of strip flooring is known to occur, apply a sealer compatible with the final coat. Final coats: 2 coats of water based polyurethane applied with a continuous wet edge and to the manufacturers instructions. Tung oil Existing floors are to be cleaned to approval, which may include removing existing finishes. All new patches to be stained and finished to match the existing floor and the whole of the floor coated with 3 coats of timber floor shellac Feast Watson or similar approved by the architect and rubbed back between coats. 3.4 COMPLETION

Cleaning General: Vacuum clean the area and protect with fabric drop sheets. Do not use plastic sheeting.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

137

September 2011

Melrose specification

Floor sanding and finishing

4 4.1

SELECTIONS SCHEDULE

Sanding Provide: - Basic sanding: Provide for all new and existing floors - Fine sanding: Provide for all new and existing floors Finishing Provide: - Coating system: Tung oil as per manufacturers instructions / specifications Include the following additional applications of materials/products compatible with the coating system: - Staining: Tung oil

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

138

September 2011

Melrose specification

ARMSTRONG resilient finishes

ARMSTRONG RESILIENT FINISHES

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide resilient floor coverings supplied by ARMSTRONG WORLD INDUSTRIES (Australia) Pty. Ltd. to substrates as follows and as documented: - To remain secured for the warranty life of the covering. - To remain consistently smooth for the warranty life of the covering. - To form the pattern required. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. 1.3 INTERPRETATION

Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply: - Resilient floor coverings classification: To BS EN 685 as follows: . Domestic Class 23. . Commercial Class 34. . Industrial Class 42. - Substrate: The building element to which the finish is to be applied. Includes subfloor as defined in AS/NZS 2455.1. - Underlay: A layer of sheet material or in situ filling on the substrate to provide a suitable surface for the resilient covering. 1.4 MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTS

Technical manuals General: Comply with Armstrong Installation Recommendations and the Armstrong Technical Data Sheets as appropriate for the selected products. 1.5 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Completion of laying underlay, if any. - Substrate immediately before fixing resilient finishes. - Completed installation. 1.6 SUBMISSIONS

Samples Range: Submit labelled samples of resilient finishes illustrating the range of colour, pattern or texture as seen in the finished work. Minimum size per sample: - Sheet: 450 x 450 mm. - Tiles: A whole tile or 0.09 m2, whichever is the greater. - Linear accessories (coving, skirting, stair nosing, protection strips, and the like): A piece 300 mm long. Welded joints: Submit a sample joint 300 mm long. Identification Labelling: Label each sample, giving product name, and the product code reference.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 139 September 2011

Melrose specification

ARMSTRONG resilient finishes

Sample panels Location: Floor Size (mm): 1000mm x 1000mm Trial set-out: Prepare a trial set-out before fixing. Subcontractors General: Submit names and contact details of proposed suppliers and installers taken from the register of suppliers and installers approved by Armstrong. Maintenance manual General: Submit the separate Armstrong published use, care, cleaning and maintenance requirements published for each type of finish, available at www.armstrongflooring.com.au. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS GENERAL

Product substitution Other resilient finishes: Conform to SUBMISSIONS, Substitutions in the General requirements worksection. Critical radiant flux Standard: To AS ISO 9239.1. Floor finishes: Conform to the values of critical radiant flux nominated in Selections. Smoke development rate Standard: To AS ISO 9239.1. Floor finishes in non-sprinklered buildings: 750 percent-minutes. 2.2 MARKING

Identification General: Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturers original sealed containers legibly marked to show the following: - The Armstrong brand - Product name. - Product type. - Dimensions and quantity. - Product reference code and batch number. - Colour. 2.3 UNDERLAYS

Cementitious General: Polymer modified cementitious self smoothing and levelling compound. - Thickness: 3 mm minimum. Fibre cement underlay Standard: To AS/NZS 2908.2, Type B, category 2 minimum. Thickness: 5 mm minimum. Wet processed fibreboard (hardboard) underlay Standard: To AS/NZS 1859.4. Classification: General purpose medium board, manufactured specifically as flooring underlay. Thickness: 5.5 mm. 2.4 VINYL FLOORING GENERALLY

Edges Sheet vinyl: Trim edges to the Armstrong installation instructions. Vinyl tiles: Ensure edges are firm, unchipped, machine-cut accurately to size and square to the face, and that tile edges are square to each other.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

140

September 2011

Melrose specification

ARMSTRONG resilient finishes

Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Resilient floor coverings Homogeneous and heterogeneous polyvinyl chloride Floorcoverings: To EN 649. Resilient floor coverings Polyvinyl chloride floor coverings with particle enhanced slip resistance: To EN 13845. Resilient floor covering polyester felt backing: To BS EN 650. Resilient floor covering, with foam layer: To BS EN 651. Adhesives Adhesives: - Sheet vinyl flooring: Armstrong SV 200. - Vinyl tiles: Armstrong PS 820. - Flooring and wall surfaces subject to frequent surface moisture: Armstrong PU-100 two part polyurethane. - Contact adhesive: Armstrong AC-100 Part A & Part B Acrylic Contact Adhesive, SC-100 Solvent Contact adhesive. - Seambond system: PU-100 two part polyurethane & SV-200. 3 3.1 EXECUTION PREPARATION

Substrates General: To AS/NZS 2455.1 Section 2. Tolerance: Conform to the Substrate tolerance table. Substrate tolerance table Property Length of straight edge laid in any direction Flatness Class A 3m Smoothness 150 mm Projections 50 mm

Max. deviation under the straight edge 3 mm 1 mm 0.5 mm

Cleaning concrete surfaces: Diamond grind with 3 phase powered equipment to mechanically remove the following surface treatments: - Sealers and hardeners. - Curing compounds. Cleaning timber surfaces: Remove oil, grease and traces of applied finishes. Concrete substrate correction: Remove projections and fill voids and hollows with a levelling compound compatible with the adhesive. Timber substrate correction: Remove projections. If conformance to the Substrate tolerance table can not be achieved fix an underlay in brick pattern with joints avoiding substrate joints. Moisture content: Do not commence installation unless: - Concrete: The moisture content of the concrete has been tested to AS/NZS 2455.1 Appendix B and the values in clause 2.4.2 (c) have been obtained. - Plywood and timber: the moisture content of battens/joists or plywood background has been tested to AS/NZS 1080.1 and values obtained as follows: . Air conditioned buildings: 8 to 10%. . Intermittently heated buildings: 10 to 12.5%. . Unheated buildings: 12 to 15%. Fixtures: Remove door stops and other fixtures, and refix in position undamaged on completion of the installation. Working environment General: Do not start work before the building is enclosed, wet work is complete and dry, and good lighting is available. Protect adjoining surfaces.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 141 September 2011

Melrose specification

ARMSTRONG resilient finishes

Conditioning General: Stabilise the room temperature for seven days before, and two days after, installation of resilient finishes, as follows: - Areas with air conditioning installed: Run air conditioning at operational temperature. - Air conditioned areas not operational: Maintain a room temperature range of < 28 > 18C. - Underfloor heating: Turn off heating 48 hours before laying. - Non-air conditioned areas: Install at < 28 > 18C. Change of finish General: Maintain finished floor level across changes of floor finish including carpet. 3.2 SHEET INSTALLATION

Sheet set out General: Set out sheets to give the minimum number of joints. Run sheet joints parallel with the long sides of floor areas, vertically on walls. Welded joints Heat welding: After fixing, groove the seams using a grooving tool and weld the joints with matching weld rod and using a hot air welding gun. Ensure the welding rod type, gun temperature and operating speed are appropriate for the flooring material. Once the weld rod has cooled off, skive off in two passes using a quarter moon (spatular knife) with a trim plate, with the second pass flush with the material. Once the weld rod has cooled off, skive off in two passes using a quarter moon (spatular knife) with a trim plate, with the second pass flush with the material. Make sure the top surface of the material is not removed exposing the material backing. This can be caused by too much weld rod flair or an uneven seam. Perimeter sealing Wet areas and areas of wet maintenance: - Install preformed vinyl coved fillet. - Cove the floor vinyl up the wall to the documented skirting height. - Seal the top edge with a bead of modified silicone based sealer. 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION

Tile set out General: Set out tiles from the centre of the area. Wherever possible cut tiles at margins only, to give a cut dimension of at least 100 mm x full tile width. Match edges and align patterns. Arrange the material so that variation in appearance is minimised. Junctions General: Scribe neatly up to returns, edges, fixtures and fittings. Finish flush with adjoining surfaces. Rolling General: Roll the finish in 2 directions using a 45 kg multi-wheeled roller. Cleaning General: Keep the surface clean as the work proceeds. 3.4 STAIRS

Installation Stair tread nosing: Install to the following sequence: Risers - Proprietary stair nosing - Treads. Combined stair tread and nosing: Install to the following sequence: Risers - Proprietary stair nosing. 3.5 JOINTS AND ACCESSORIES

Accessories General: Provide purpose-made matching moulded accessories for nosings, coves, skirtings, edge cover strips and finishes at junctions, margins, and angles, if available. Otherwise form accessories from the sheet material. Provide solid backing for radiused coves and nosings. Junctions General: Finish junctions tapered to adjoining surfaces. Where changes of floor finish occur at doorways locate the joint on the centreline of the closed door leaf. All floors to be flush with NO STEP. New floors to W.C. and kitchen to be set down to have flush finish with existing floors.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 142 September 2011

Melrose specification

ARMSTRONG resilient finishes

Edge strips Locations: Provide edge cover strips at junctions with different floor finishes and to exposed edges. PVC cover strip: Diminishing strip matching the floor finish, fixed with contact adhesive. Metal cover strip: Extruded tapered strip 25 mm wide, of the same thickness as the sheet or tile. Fix with matching screws to timber bases or to masonry anchors in concrete bases, at 200 mm maximum centres. - Material: Aluminium Control joints Location: Provide control joints as follows: - Over structural control joints. - At junctions between different substrates. Depth of joint: Right through to the substrate. Sealant width: 6 25 mm. Depth of elastomeric sealant: One half the joint width, or 6 mm, whichever is the greater. Control joint materials sheet flooring Armstrong product: X-pand strip as per manufacturers instructions Vinyl skirting Resilient flooring: Armstrong Feather Edge Skirting: - Height: 150mm Carpet finish or door kickboard: Armstrong Flat Skirting: - Height: 150mm Fixing: Scribe as necessary. Mitre corners. Fix to walls with contact adhesive. Preformed vinyl coved skirtings Skirting: Return sheet vinyl flooring up the wall over a preformed cove fillet. Height: 150mm Product: Armstrong Cove fillet. Size:20 x 20mm 3.6 COMPLETION

Protection of sheet materials General: Keep traffic off floors until bonding has set or for 24 hours after laying, whichever period is the longer. Do not allow water in contact with the finish for 7 days. Reinstatement: Repair or replace faulty or damaged work. If the work cannot be repaired satisfactorily, replace the whole area affected. Warranties Form: Manufacturer warranties are available from Armstrong as follows: - Installations using Armstrong adhesive products: 10 years. - Installations using other adhesive products: 5 years. Certificate of compliance General: Provide a Certificate of compliance for: - Reaction to fire to AS ISO 9239.1. - Antistatic and conductive floor installations. - Slip resistance to AS/NZS 4586. Maintenance manual General: Submit the separate Armstrong published use, care, cleaning and maintenance requirements published for each type of finish, available at www.armstrongflooring.com.au. Spare materials General: Supply spare matching covering materials and accessories of each type for future replacement purposes. Store the spare materials on site where directed. Quantity: At least 1% of the quantity installed.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

143

September 2011

Melrose specification

ARMSTRONG resilient finishes

Spare material schedule Material

Quantity

Storage location

Cleaning General: Mop and leave the finished surface clean and undamaged on completion. 4 4.1 SELECTIONS SCHEDULES Code Kitchen Vinyl sheet flooring Refer to architectural drawings & schedules Fibre cement sheet R rating to AS/NZS 4586

Sheet vinyl flooring schedule Property Armstrong product Colour

Underlay Slip resistance grade: To AS/NZS 4586 - Wet pendulum - Wet barefoot ramp - Oil wet ramp Critical radiant flux

W.C. Vinyl sheet flooring Refer to architectural drawings & schedules Fibre cement sheet R rating to AS/NZS 4586

AS/NZS 4586 AS/NZS 4586

Flooring accessories schedule Property Tactile indicators directional: - Product - Colour Tactile indicators warning: - Product - Colour Wedge fillet Wall capping strip Tile edge trim Stairs Cover strips

Code VF1

VF2

VF3

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

144

September 2011

Melrose specification

Painting

PAINTING

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide coating systems to new or previously painted substrates as follows: - With sound adhesion and durability. - Consistent in colour, gloss level, texture and dry film thickness. - Free of runs, sags, blisters, or other discontinuities. - Paint systems fully opaque. - Clear finishes at the level of transparency consistent with the product. - Fully adhered. - Resistant to environmental degradation within the manufacturers stated life span. Selections: Conform to the Selections. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. - Architectural schedules and drawings 1.3 STANDARDS

Painting General: Comply with the recommendations of those parts of AS/NZS 2311 which are referenced in this worksection. 1.4 SUBMISSIONS

Clear finish coated samples General: Submit pieces of timber or timber veneer matching the timber to be used in the works, prepared, puttied, stained, sealed and coated in accordance with the specified system, of sufficient size so that, each piece can be cut into 4 segments, marked for identification, and distributed as directed. Opaque coated samples General: Submit, on representative substrates, samples of each coating system showing surface preparation, colour, gloss level, texture, and physical properties; to the Coated samples schedule. Coated samples schedule Provide samples on site of all coatings systems Paint General: Submit the selected manufacturers details at least 3 weeks before the paint is required, as follows: - Paint brand name and paint line quality statement. - Material safety data sheets (MSDS) showing the health and safety precautions to be taken during application. - The published recommendations for maintenance. 2 2.1 PRODUCTS PAINTS

Paint brand Quality: If the product is offered in a number of levels of quality, provide premium quality lines. Combinations General: Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 145 September 2011

Melrose specification

Painting

Clear timber finish systems: Provide only the combinations of putty, stain and sealer recommended by the manufacturer of the top coats. Delivery General: Deliver paints to the site in the manufacturers labelled and unopened containers. Putty and fillers Material: To the recommendation of the paint system manufacturer, as suitable for the substrate and compatible with the primer. Tinting General: Provide only products which are colour tinted by the manufacturer or supplier. Toxic ingredients General: Comply with the requirements of Appendix I Uniform Paint Standard to the Standard for the Uniform Scheduling of Drugs and Poisons (SUSDP). 3 3.1 EXECUTION PREPARATION

Order of work Other trades: Before painting, complete the work of other trades as far as practicable within the area to be painted, except for installation of fittings, floor sanding and laying flooring materials. Clear finishes: Complete clear timber finishes before commencing opaque paint finishes in the same area. Protection General: Before painting, clean the area and protect it against dust entry. Use drop sheets and masking to protect finished surfaces or other surfaces at risk of damage during painting. Internal and external fixtures and furniture: Remove door furniture, switch plates, light fittings and other fixtures before starting to paint, and refix in position undamaged on completion of painting. Adjacent surfaces: Protect adjacent finished surfaces liable to damage from painting operations. Wet paint warning General: Place notices conspicuously and do not remove them until paint is dry. Repair General: Clean off marks, paint spots and stains progressively and restore damaged surfaces to their original condition. Touch up new damaged decorative paintwork or misses only with the paint batch used in the original application. Substrates General: Prepare substrates to receive the painting systems. Cleaning: Clean down the substrate surface. Do not cause undue damage to the substrate or damage to, or contamination of, the surroundings. Filling: Fill cracks and holes with fillers, sealants, putties or grouting cements as appropriate for the finishing system and substrate, and sand smooth. Clear finish: Provide filler tinted to match the substrate. Clear timber finish systems: Prepare the surface so that its attributes will show through the clear finish without blemishes, by methods which may involve the following: - Removal of bruises. - Removal of discolourations, including staining by oil, grease and nailheads. - Bleaching where necessary to match the timber colour sample. - Puttying. - Fine sanding (last abrasive no coarser than 220 grit) to show no scratches across the grain. Unpainted surfaces Standard: To AS/NZS 2311 Section 3. Previously painted surfaces Preparation of a substrate in good condition: To AS/NZS 2311 clause 7.4. Preparation of a substrate in poor condition: To AS/NZS 2311 clause 7.5. Preparation of steel substrates with protective coatings: To AS/NZS 2312 Section 10 and AS 1627.1.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 146 September 2011

Melrose specification

Painting

Additional preparation: - Seal stained ceilings before the application of latex paints. - Clean PVC with methylated spirit and a nylon scouring pad. - Remove wall paper and glue size with clean water and seal before painting. - Remove water based kalsomine or lime wash paints by brushing with warm water. 3.2 PAINTING

Light levels General: 400 lux. Drying General: Use a moisture meter to demonstrate that the moisture content of the substrate is at or below the recommended maximum level for the type of paint and the substrate material. Paint application Standard: To AS/NZS 2311 Section 6. Timing: Apply the first coat immediately after substrate preparation and before contamination of the substrate can occur. Apply subsequent coats after the manufacturers recommended drying period has elapsed. Painting conditions General: Do not paint in dusty conditions, or otherwise unsuitable weather as follows unless the paint is suitable and recommended for such conditions: - Relative humidity: 85%. - Surface temperature 10C or 35C. Priming before fixing General: Apply one coat of wood primer (2 coats to end grain) to the back of the following before fixing in position: - External fascia boards. - Timber door and window frames. - Bottoms of external doors. - Associated trims and glazing beads. - Timber board cladding. Spraying General: If the paint application is by spraying, use conventional or airless equipment which does the following: - Satisfactorily atomises the paint being applied. - Does not require the paint to be thinned beyond the maximum amount recommended by the manufacturer. - Does not introduce oil, water or other contaminants into the applied paint. Paint with known health hazards: Provide masking, ventilating and screening facilities generally to the standards set out for spray painting booths, AS/NZS 4114.1 and AS/NZS 4114.2. Sanding Clear finishes: Sand the sealer using the finest possible abrasive (no coarser than 320 grit) and avoid cutting through the colour. Take special care with round surfaces and edges. Repair of galvanizing General: For galvanized surfaces which have been subsequently welded, prime the affected area. Primer: Organic zinc rich coating for the protection of steel to AS/NZS 3750.9 Type 2. Tinting General: Tint each coat of an opaque coating system so that each has a noticeably different tint from the preceding coat, except for top coats in systems with more than one top coat. Services General: If not embedded, paint new services and equipment including in plant rooms, except chromium, anodised aluminium, GRP, UPVC, stainless steel, non-metallic flexible materials and normally lubricated machined surfaces. Repaint proprietary items only if damaged.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

147

September 2011

Melrose specification

Painting

Windows Operation: Ensure that opening windows function correctly before and after painting. Ensure the tops of all windows are painted without effecting operation Door leafs Drying: Leave doors fixed open to allow drying. Do not allow door hardware, accessories or the like to damage the door finish during the drying process. Ensure the tops of all doors are painted without effecting operation

4 4.1

SELECTIONS PAINTING SYSTEMS

New unpainted interior surfaces Standard: To AS/NZS 2311 Table 5.1. New unpainted exterior surfaces Standard: To AS/NZS 2311 Table 5.2. Specialised painting systems Standard: To AS/NZS 2311 clause 5.2 for the following final coats: - High build textured or membrane finishes (B38 to AS/NZS 2311). - 2 pack gloss pigmented polyurethane (B44 to AS/NZS 2311). - 2 pack epoxy (B29 to AS/NZS 2311). - 2 pack water based epoxy (B29A to AS/NZS 2311). Previously painted surfaces Standard: To AS/NZS 2311 Section 8. Apply the following: - Sealer and Undercoat: 4.2 PAINTING SCHEDULES

General Number of coats: Unless specified as one or two coat systems, each paint system consists of at least 3 coats. Final coat selection: To the Interior painting schedule and the Exterior painting schedule. Low VOC emitting paints Provide the VOC limits noted in the Interior painting schedule and the Exterior painting schedule. Paint colours Number of separate colours: Supply paint to the Paint colour schedule. Paint colour schedule Refer to the schedule of interior finishes for colours and finishes

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

148

September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

MECHANICAL DESIGN AND INSTALL

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide the mechanical services as per the mechanical engineers specification and drawings Selections: As documented. Designer: Kuttner Collins Other suggested design text can be found in Design clauses in the respective worksections (e.g. Ductwork). 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. - Mechanical engineers specification takes precedence - Mechanical engineers specification and drawings 1.3 STANDARDS

General Electrical services: To Part 2 of AS/NZS 3000 unless otherwise documented. Electrical systems: To AS/NZS 3008.1.1 and SAA HB 301. Degrees of protection (IP code): To AS 60529. EMC: To AS/NZS 61000. Mechanical ventilation and air conditioning: To AS/NZS 1668.1 and AS 1668.2, as required by the Building Code of Australia. Microbial control: To AS/NZS 3666.1, AS/NZS 3666.2 and the recommendations of SAA/SNZ HB 32. Refrigeration systems: To AS/NZS 1677.2 and the recommendations of SAA HB 40.1 and SAA HB 40.2. Plumbing, drainage and water supply: To AS/NZS 3500.1, AS/NZS 3500.2 and the PCA. Telecommunications systems: To AS/ACIF S008, AS/ACIF S009, AS/NZS 3080, SAA HB 243 and SAA HB 29. 2 2.1 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DESIGN

Air conditioning system design General: Provide systems designed in conformance with the following. Outdoor design conditions General: Use design conditions listed in AIRAH DA09, Table 1 or Table 1A for: - The location geographically closest to the site. - Comfort (or Non-Critical Process) Conditions. Indoor design conditions General: Conform to the following: - Summer: 24C dry bulb, 50% relative humidity. - Winter: 21C dry bulb. Cooling performance Requirement: Maintain the air conditioned spaces, as measured at the points of control, within the documented cooling indoor design conditions at the highest cooling load due to the combination of the following:

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

149

September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

- Loads imposed by the cooling outdoor design conditions. - Other documented cooling loads are at their maximum. - Solar cooling load. - Loads due to system and other looses. Heating performance Requirement: Maintain the air conditioned spaces, as measured at the points of control, within the documented heating indoor design conditions at the highest heating load due to the combination of the following: - Loads imposed by the heating outdoor design conditions. - Other documented cooling loads are zero. - Solar cooling load is zero. - Loads due to system and other looses. Temperature variation Requirement: Limit the temperature difference in air conditioned spaces served by the same zone or system to 3C as follows: - Between any 2 points in the space from floor level to 1500 mm above floor level. - > 2000 mm from cooking equipment and > 1000 mm from any other appliance. - When the documented outdoor conditions are not exceeded. - After the plant has been operating for one hour. - With the temperatures measured in the same 5 minute period. Air conditioning heating and cooling load calculations Standards: Conform to the recommendations of: - AIRAH DA09. - ASHRAE. Method of calculation: Manual or software that employs the data and methods in the above standards. Zoning: Divide the systems into temperature controlled zones to meet the stated permissible limits in temperature variation, and the system divisions stated in the equipment schedule. Fresh air: Supply fresh air to spaces with air conditioning systems via the air handling system. Windows, walls, floors and roofs: Refer to drawings for construction and insulation. Internal window shading: Refer to Window schedule. Lighting load: Refer to drawings for lighting layout and details. Internal equipment loads: Refer to Internal air conditioning loads schedule. No. of people: Refer to Internal air conditioning loads schedule. Supply air: To each air conditioned space 4.5 L/s/m at all times the plant is operational. Noise levels General: To the General requirements worksection Responsibilities. Ambient noise emitted: Lower than the level that can be heard within a habitable room in any neighbouring premises, regardless of whether any door or window to that room is open. Fire separation General: As documented. Heating Requirement: Use reverse cycle plant to provide heating. Divide air conditioned areas between systems so that cooling and reverse cycle heating can be provided simultaneously. Supplementary heat for zoning or other purposes: May be provided by electric duct heaters but must be < 20% of the total heating load. Mechanical ventilation system design Standard: Conform to the deemed to comply provisions of AS 1668.2. Natural ventilation Alternatives: As an alternative to mechanical ventilation, natural ventilation to AS 1668.2-2002 may be offered, provided it conforms to statutory requirements. Energy efficiency Requirement: Conform to the BCA.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 150 September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

2.2

SUBMISSIONS

General Before starting work, submit the following: - Outdoor design conditions, corresponding geographic location and source of data. - Calculated total and sensible cooling capacities and heating capacity. - Name of calculation method used. - Makes and model numbers of proposed equipment. - Total and sensible cooling capacities and heating capacity of the proposed equipment, adjusted for the documented outdoor and indoor conditions and any effects of the proposed plant configuration. - Any assumptions on which the calculations are based. - Details of any departures from this specification. - Details of fire provisions. - A drawing of the proposed duct, pipe and equipment layout. Show proposed zoning and methods of heating. - Proposed plant locations. - Method of heating and % of total heating load in the case of electric heating. - Mechanical contractor provision for attendance to breakdowns. - Availability of service network of plant manufacturer. - AREMA certification of equipment. - Proposed ventilation systems. - Licence numbers and type of licences held by persons responsible for the installation. 3 3.1 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide packaged air conditioning plant. Split systems: Supply indoor and outdoor units of split systems designed and rated by the manufacturer to operate together. 3.2 GENERAL

Operating conditions General: Provide equipment that operates within an ambient temperature range of 0C to 45C, without excessive head pressure, unstable operation or icing. Split systems Outdoor units: Provide packaged condensing units consisting of refrigerant condensers, compressors and associated piping and electrical connections, mounted within the condenser enclosure. Indoor units: Provide units consisting of coils, piping, supply air fan, accessories and electrical connections, mounted within an insulated enclosure. One-piece packages General: Provide packaged units consisting of refrigerant condensers, compressors, supply air fan, cooling coil and associated piping and electrical connections, mounted within the same enclosure. Filters Filters: Type 1 to AS 1324.1 with Class and Performance rating as documented but not less than: Test Dust No. 1 to AS 1324.2: 20% efficiency. Test Dust No. 4 to AS 1324.2: 85% arrestance. 3.3 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES

General General: Provide enclosures, materials and finishes that are weatherproof and corrosion-resistant, assembled and reinforced to prevent flexing and drumming. Material and finishes Materials: Conform to the following:
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 151 September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

- Metallic-coated steel: Base and legs 1.6 mm with 1.0 mm panels. - Aluminium: Base and legs 2.0 mm with 1.6 mm panels. Outdoor equipment finishes: Powder coat all metallic-coated steel interior and exterior surfaces to AS 3715 or AS 4506 as appropriate. Insulation General: Insulate enclosures to prevent external surface condensation under all operating conditions. Fix insulation to panels with waterproof adhesive applied to at least 50% of the panel area. 3.4 REFRIGERATION PIPING

General General: Conform to equipment manufacturers recommendations for the refrigerant used. Provide refrigeration piping designed and installed so that the complete system meets the documented performance under the documented operating conditions. 3.5 CONDENSATE DRAINS See AS/NZS 3666.1 clauses 2.8 and 2.9 for drainage requirements and recommendations. General Condensate drains: Provide trapped drain lines with uniform and continuous fall to connect condensate trays to the nearest building drain point. Provide drains from: - Each indoor coil. - Each outdoor coil unless casing freely drains to a roof or other location where condensate and/or rain water will not cause damage or pond. - Each safety tray. - Other moisture and rainwater collecting areas. 3.6 SAFETY TRAY

Location General: Provide a safety tray under packaged unit and indoor unit of split systems if leaks or condensation from these could cause nuisance or damage to the building or its contents. Reverse cycle units: If reverse cycle outdoor units do not have drain connections, locate safety tray below unit and pipe drain to waste. 3.7 UNIT INSTALLATION

General General: Supply all necessary components, including but not limited to: - Means of attachment to the structure. - Anti-vibration mounting. - Appropriate flexible connections. - Trim and sealing around openings. - Electrical connections. - Drainage connections. - Field connection of refrigerant lines in split systems. Alignment: Install units level, plumb and to manufacturers recommendations. Outdoor equipment Arrangement: Provide clearance around units for condenser air flow and maintenance access. Make sure discharge air does not short-circuit to condenser intake. Plinths: If located on grassed or similar permeable surfaces provide concrete plinths under outdoor equipment. Fixings: Bolt units in place with minimum 4 anchors or suspension rods. Duct connections Supply duct: Provide internal or external flexible duct connection. Comply with Flexible connections in the Ductwork worksection. Return, outside air and condenser duct connections: Provide external flexible duct connection.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

152

September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

4 4.1

ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide room air conditioners. Split systems: Supply indoor and outdoor units of split systems designed and rated by the manufacturer to operate together. 4.2 GENERAL

Safety General: Comply with AS/NZS 3350.2.34 and AS/NZS 3350.2.40. Construction Insulation: Insulate and vapour seal to prevent external condensation under all operating conditions. Supply fan: Centrifugal with multi-speed or variable speed motor. Filter performance to AS 1324.1: G2 rating, Type 1 (dry media), Class C (washable media in a reusable frame). Condenser fans: Low speed propeller or axial. Coils: Copper tube, aluminium plate fin type with no moisture carry over. Drains: Provide aluminium, stainless steel or plastic drain trays to collect all moisture generated inside unit. Provide trapped drain to waste. 4.3 CONDENSATE DRAINS

General Condensate drains: Provide trapped drain lines with uniform and continuous fall to connect condensate trays to the nearest building drain point. Provide drains from: - Each indoor coil. - Each outdoor coil unless casing freely drains to a roof or other location where condensate and/or rain water will not cause damage or pond. 5 5.1 FANS RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide fans as documented. 5.2 DESIGN

Centrifugal fans Centrifugal fans: Provide fans selected so the air flow can be increased 5% above the rate documented as follows: - Against the corresponding increased system resistance as installed. - Without unstable operation. - By speed change alone. Axial flow fans Axial flow fans: Provide fans selected so the air flow can be increased 5% above the rate documented as follows: - Against the corresponding increased system resistance as installed. - Without unstable operation. - By pitch angle change alone. Fans with multi-speed motors: - Two speed fans: Provide fans selected to perform documented duties. - Fans with 3 speeds and single phase fans with adjustable speed control: Provide fans selected to achieve the documented duty at a speed 80% of highest speed.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

153

September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

5.3

CENTRIFUGAL FANS IN-LINE

General General: Provide fans with non-overloading power characteristics. Construction Casings: Rectangular or circular with spigot or flanges for duct mounting, with construction as follows: - Steel: Metallic-coated steel sheet, spot welded. Brush and prime spot welds with zinc-rich organic primer to AS/NZS 3750.9. - Glass reinforced plastic (GRP) or plastic: Moulded GRP or impact resistant plastic with integral support foot. Impellers: Backward inclined or forward curved style as scheduled, constructed from metallic-coated steel, extruded aluminium or polypropylene. Balance impellers statically and dynamically. Motors: Direct mounted to impellers with minimum thermal class 155 (F) insulation to IEC 60085. Provide sealed for life bearings with a minimum rating fatigue life of 40 000 hours at 40oC ambient. Electrical connection: Provide terminal box external to fan casing and wired to fan motor. Access: - Impellers < 350 mm diameter: Provide fan manufacturer's standard fast clamps both sides of the fan to permit removal of the impeller-motor assembly or fan as a whole. 5.4 AXIAL FLOW FANS

General Provide fans with non-overloading power characteristics. Casings Tubular, flanged at each end, constructed from mild steel, fully welded, hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Impellers General: Provide aerofoil section blades constructed from cast aluminium alloy or glass reinforced plastic. 5.5 ROOF MOUNTED FANS

Types General: Centrifugal, mixed flow, aerofoil axial or propeller. Axial flow and propeller: Comply with Axial flow fans. Mixed flow fans: - Impeller: Mixed flow with rotating parts vibration isolated from the unit casings by suitable resilient mountings. - Arrangement: Position the motor above the impeller to allow servicing from above the roof. Housing General: House fans in compact bases fitted with weathering skirts and a hinged or removable weatherproof cowl with bird screen. Material: UV stabilised ABS, polypropylene, polyethylene, glass-fibre reinforced polyester or steel, hotdip galvanised (HDG) after manufacture, material as documented. Vertical discharge General: Provide weatherproof galvanized steel, plastic or aluminium backdraft dampers where the weather may enter when units are stopped. Backdraft damper closure: Counter weighted or electrically driven. Motors Bearings: Provide bearings sealed for life or grease packed fitted with lubrication lines extending through roof cowls. Provide bearings with a minimum rating fatigue life of 40 000 hours. Provide access to grease relief ports. Minimum degree of protection: IP55. 5.6 WINDOW/WALL FANS

General Housing: Provide:


NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 154 September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

- Isolating mountings. - Discharge cowls with birdmesh guards. - Backdraft shutters constructed from lightweight nylon or aluminium blades, arranged to gravity close when fans are not operating. 5.7 INSTALLATION

Duct connections Provide flexible connections to prevent transmission of vibration to ductwork. If under negative pressure, make sure that flexible connection does not reduce fan inlet area. If necessary, provide spacer pieces between fans and flexible connections. 6 6.1 DUCTWORK RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide ductwork as documented. 6.2 DESIGN

Standards Design and installation: Conform to the recommendations of: - AIRAH DA09. - ASHRAE. - ASHRAE Systems and Equipment Handbook. Method of calculation: Manual or software that employs the data and methods in the above standards. Rigid sheet metal ductwork Duct design: Size ductwork as follows: - Velocity: 6 m/s. - Pressure loss: 1.2 Pa/m. Flexible duct Requirement: Conform to the following: - Velocity: 4.0 m/s. - Length: 6 m total flexible duct length in the air path between the fan and furthest outlet or grille served. Provide rigid sheet metal duct for the remainder of the air path between the fan and furthest outlet or grille served. 6.3 STANDARD

General Ductwork: To AS 4254. 6.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT

Materials Uninsulated flexible duct: Aluminised fabric clamped on a formed metal helix. Do not use adhesives. If a metal helix is provided, it must not be in contact with the air stream. Insulated flexible duct: As for uninsulated flexible duct with flexible blanket insulation wrapped around duct and covered with an outer vapour barrier. Material R-value: To BCA Spec J5.2. 6.5 DAMPERS GENERAL

Location Provide balancing dampers at each branch duct or tee: - Splitter type: Use only for supply branches up to 600 mm wide and with velocity in main < 10 m/s. Do not use on return or exhaust ducts. - Opposed blade dampers: Use for any size supply and for all return and exhaust ducts. Locate in each branch.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

155

September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

6.6

ACCESS OPENINGS LOCATION

Access panels Location: Provide access panels in the following locations: - Next to each component located inside the duct requiring regular inspection and maintenance including, but not limited to: . Fire and smoke dampers. . Smoke detectors. . Motorised dampers. . Filters. . On the air entering side of electric duct heaters. . On the air entering side of duct mounted heating coils. - In air handling units where unit size is insufficient to fit an access door. 6.7 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS

General Standard: To AS/NZS 3102. Elements: Sheathed in steel or nickel alloy. Provide brazed spiral steel fins. Frames: Assemble elements in a galvanized steel frame with terminal connections contained in an enclosed terminal box. Heating section: Install to allow access to the terminal box and removal of the assembly without disturbing other components. Fin rating: < 20 W/.m. Electrical connection: Provide a permanent electrical connection to the heater. 6.8 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION

Arrangement Arrange ductwork neatly. Provide access to ductwork components which require inspection, entry, maintenance and repairs. Where possible arrange duct runs adjacent and parallel to each other and to building elements. Flexible duct General: Install flexible duct as straight as possible with minimum number of bends. Maximise bend radius but not less than AS 4254 clause 2.8.5 (h). Joints: Securely fix flexible duct to rigid spigots and sleeves using sealant and draw band encased with at least two wraps of duct sealing tape. Joints between flexible ducts: Join lengths of flexible duct only for the purpose of providing an air tight or acoustic sleeve at a partition. Support: To AS 4254. Limit sag to < 40 mm/m. Maximum length of flexible duct sections: 6 metres including any rigid duct or sleeves used to join lengths of flexible duct. Flexible ducts used for air containing free moisture: Locate supporting helix outside airstream. 7 7.1 DUCTWORK INSULATION RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide insulation of ductwork and related items. 7.2 STANDARDS

General Ductwork insulation: To AS 4254. 7.3 INSULATION PERFORMANCE

General Insulation material R-Value: To BCA Spec J5.2 and as documented.


NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 156 September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

7.4

INSULATION MATERIALS

Insulation materials Standard: To AS/NZS 4859.1. Type: In batt, board or blanket form. Polyester: Thermally bonded polyester fibres. Polyolefin: Closed cell cross-linked polyolefin foam produced using non-CFC blowing agent. Aluminium foil laminate sheet Standard: To AS/NZS 4200.1 as follows: - Internal insulation: Heavy duty before perforation. - External insulation: Heavy duty unperforated. 7.5 INTERNAL INSULATION LAMINATE FACED

System description Insulation type: Semi-rigid board or batt. Surface facing: Factory applied perforated aluminium foil laminate. Fixing method Method: Select from the following: - Corner angle and end nosing method. - Free edge method. Fixing pins: Provide to AS 4254 clause 2.7.1 (g). Corner angle and end nosing method Corners: Overlap insulation on adjacent sides at corners. Hold insulation in position with metalliccoated steel corner angles. Fix corner angles under the turn back of the end nosing. For corner angles longer than 1600 mm provide additional fixing at 1600 mm maximum centres. Free edge method General: Use only where larger duct side is 300 mm. Edges: Extend insulation proud of ductwork at each end, to provide cushion joints that fully seal during assembly. 7.6 EXTERNAL INSULATION LAMINATE FACED

System description Insulation type: Flexible batts or blanket. Surface facing: Factory applied aluminium foil laminate. Application General: Wrap insulation around the outside of ducts, covering the parts designated to be insulated. Minimise the number of joints. Fixing method Materials other than polyolefin foam: Select from the following: - Pin method: Provide pins to each face of the duct as follows: . Horizontal ducts < 380 mm wide: Pins not required. . Horizontal ducts > 380, < 760 mm wide: One row of pins along centreline to side and bottom duct faces at 380 mm maximum centres. . Horizontal ducts 760 mm wide: Pins spaced at 380 mm maximum centres. . Vertical ducts < 610 mm wide: Pins not required. . Vertical ducts 610 mm wide: Pins spaced at 380 mm maximum centres. - Strap and pin method: Provide 12 mm wide polypropylene strapping at maximum 600 mm intervals. . Horizontal ducts 600 mm wide: Hold insulation in position on the underside with fixing pins spaced at 400 mm maximum centres with at least one row per duct face. . Vertical ducts 600 mm wide: Provide pins to all faces at 400 mm maximum centres. - Corner angle and strap method: Provide metallic-coated sheet steel corner angles on all four sides of the duct. Retain with 12 mm wide polypropylene strapping at maximum 750 mm intervals. Provide angles as follows: . 25 mm nominal thickness insulation: 38 x 38 mm.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 157 September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

. 50 mm nominal thickness insulation: 63 x 63 mm. Polyolefin foam: Provide pins spaced 50 mm from all edges and spaced 200 to 300 mm apart in all directions. 7.7 INSULATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

Plenum boxes on air outlets Insulation type: Internal insulation, with perforated aluminium foil laminate, black finish. Material R-Value: Same as the connected duct. 7.8 INSULATION OF DUCT FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

General General: Insulate duct flexible connections if the temperature of the air inside the duct may cause condensation on the outside of the flexible connection. Material R-Value: Same as the connected duct. 8 8.1 AIR GRILLES RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide air grilles. 8.2 DESIGN

General Requirement: Provide air distribution equipment to achieve the documented system performance. Supply air Requirement: Provide supply grilles, diffusers or unducted room air conditioners to: - Evenly distribute supply air within the space free from draughts and to achieve the documented permissible temperature variation. - Achieve the documented noise levels within the space. - With at least one grille, diffuser or unducted room air conditioner in each room or space served. Return air Requirement: Provide return air grilles to: - Return air to the air conditioning plant in a energy efficient manner. - Achieve the documented noise levels within the space. Door grilles Requirement: Provide door grilles to: - Return air to the plant if the return air path is through the door opening. - Provide make-up air to exhaust ventilated spaces. - In other locations necessary to prevent excessive space air pressures and achieve energy efficient plant operation. Exhaust grilles Requirement: Provide exhaust grilles to meet statutory ventilation requirements. Outside air grilles and louvres Requirement: Provide grilles and louvres on the face of the building to: - Supply fresh air to air conditioning and ventilation plant. - Provide relief of exhaust and return air. - Prevent the entry of rain and vermin. 8.3 GENERAL

Manufacture General: Provide proprietary grilles: - Free from distortion, bends, surface defects, irregular joints, exposed fastenings and operation vibration. - Mounted with secure and concealed fixings.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 158 September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

- With flange corners neatly mitred, butted and buffed, with no joint gaps. Material: Steel or aluminium. Finish: - Exposed surfaces: Powder coated to nominated colour. 8.4 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS Alternatively show the damper types and locations on the drawings. Dampers controlling a single diffuser and grille attached to flexible duct General: Provide a damper as follows: - If the duct spigot is located above a tiled or otherwise accessible ceiling: Provide a butterfly damper in the rigid duct spigot. - If the duct spigot is not located above a tiled or otherwise accessible ceiling: Provide an opposed blade damper behind the face of the diffuser or grille. 8.5 AIR GRILLE TYPES

Louvre ceiling diffusers General: Provide either: - Multi-bladed, removable core 4-way blow configuration, fitted with a blanking plate for 1-, 2-, or 3way blow, as appropriate; or - Multi-bladed, removable core 1-, 2-, 3- or 4-way blow configuration. Reducer necks: If the outlet neck is smaller than the outlet necessary to suit the louvre face size, provide a reducer neck. Frame: Provide a frame style to suit the type of ceiling, and ceiling grid mounting requirements. Cushion head: If the diffuser is connected to a flexible duct, provide a cushion head box. Air volume control: Conform to Volume control dampers. Side wall registers General: Double deflection type with horizontal front louvre blades and vertical rear blades at 19 mm nominal centres, capable of field adjustment of air throw over the range 45. Construction: Extruded aluminium with mitred corners and aerofoil section blades which rotate in non metallic bearings in the support frame. Hold blades firmly so they do not rattle or flutter. Core: Provide a removable core (support frame and blades). Blades > 600 mm long: Support at mid point on a notched support bar. Dampers: Provide a stream splitter or opposed blade type damper behind each register, to provide even air flow across the register face. Thermally powered VAV diffusers Type: Proprietary VAV diffuser with integral actuator and dampers to adjust air volume in response to temperature sensed at the diffuser. Provide uniform air distribution pattern to maximise Coanda effect over the operating range from full open to the minimum air flow. Construction: Provide an appearance panel mounted within a pressed diffuser frame. Material: Powder coated metallic-coated steel sheet. Frame: Provide a frame style to suit the type of ceiling, and ceiling grid mounting requirements. Operation: Provide integral hinged dampers to vary the outlet supply air volume under the control of an inbuilt room temperature sensing element. Control: Provide either: - Self-powered type with expanding wax or similar temperature sensitive elements. - Line powered with integral 24 volt transformer. Heating operation: If the system operates in both heating and cooling modes provide a factory preset supply duct temperature sensor that reverses the control action between heating and cooling. Operate in cooling mode when the air supply is below 20C and in heating mode when supply air is above 27C. Room temperature set point: Adjustable from below the face of the diffuser over the range 21C to 26C. Cushion head: If the diffuser is connected to a flexible duct, provide a cushion head box.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 159 September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

Air volume control: Conform to Volume control dampers. Weatherproof louvre grilles Construction: Extruded aluminium with fixed horizontal blades set into a fixed frame. Louvre blades: Set at nominal 45 angle and incorporating at least one hooked edge to prevent ingress of water under all operating conditions. Brace and stiffen to prevent rattling or movement. Frame: Flanged or channel to suit the installation profile. Pressure drop: 15 Pa at the documented air flow. Screens: Provide metallic-coated steel wire or PVC-U mesh screens behind louvres to prevent the entry of vermin, birds, rodents and wind blown extraneous material such as leaves and papers. Return or exhaust grilles indoor Construction: Extruded aluminium with fixed horizontal blades set into a fixed support frame with mitred corners. Fit blades tightly into the frame to prevent rattling or movement. Brace and stiffen to produce a rigid assembly. Pressure drop: 10 Pa at the documented air flow. Blades: - Half chevron type: Blades at nominal 45 angle on a nominal 25 mm pitch. - Inverted V chevron type: Blades at nominal 25 mm pitch. Provide a telescopic frame with clip-on pattern surround frames on both sides. - Light proof grilles: Inverted V chevron type but with double inverted V chevron blades and blade pitch selected to stop light penetration. Air volume control: If the grille is connected to a duct, provide an opposed blade damper behind the grille core, key operated without removing the grille core. Egg crate return or exhaust grilles Construction: Nominal 12 x 12 mm square, 12 mm deep egg crate type aluminium core fixed in an extruded aluminium frame with mitred corners. Fit core tightly into the frame to prevent rattling or movement. Free Area: 90% of nominal face area. Air volume control: If the grille is connected to a duct, provide an opposed blade damper behind the grille core, key operated without removing the grille core. 8.6 INSTALLATION OF AIR GRILLES

Mounting General: Provide a matching escutcheon to close gaps between the grille and its surrounds. Provide grilles with flanges to cover penetrations and irregularities in surrounds. Tiled ceilings: Locate grilles and diffusers to minimise cut tiles. Otherwise, locate grille symmetrically in the tile. Appearance: Install square. Fixing Visibility: Provide concealed fixings. Accessibility: Provide fixings which allow removal without damage to surrounds or outlets. Gaskets: Provide foam type gaskets under outlet flanges or flanged supports. Plenum and cushion head boxes General: Provide side entry plenum or cushion head boxes to diffusers and grilles connected to flexible ductwork. 9 9.1 AUTOMATIC CONTROLS RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide automatic control systems to provide the documented control functions and system performance.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

160

September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

9.2

DESIGN

Performance: Within the documented plant capacities, maintain the documented conditions. Provide control systems that are safe and stable in operation under all anticipated operating conditions including start up, shut down and fault condition. Safety: Provide control devices and software to protect personnel from injury and equipment from damage by either normal or abnormal operation of the control system, including the removal and reapplication of power whether expected or unexpected. Operating environment: Provide components that function correctly in their local environment. 9.3 GENERAL

Control components General: Provide sensors and control components that are: - Of corrosion resistant construction. - Suitable for the respective operating environment. - Not affected by the accumulation of dust or moisture, extraneous influences or variation of 30% in supply voltage. - Protected against the entry of vermin. - Selected for a response time appropriate to the application. - Provided with proprietary connections suitable for the size and type of cable used. 9.4 INPUT DEVICES GENERAL

General General: Provide input devices with the following characteristics: - With range, accuracy and response time appropriate to the required control function including the effects of transducer accuracy and signal transmission errors. - Maintain documented performance over time. - Protected by location or otherwise from extraneous influences including sunlight, heat sources and nonrepresentative locations. 9.5 INSTALLATION INPUT DEVICES

Sensors in occupied areas Installation: Securely attach to walls, ceilings or columns. Mount on concealed junction boxes and seal cable entries to prevent air from the cavity entering the junction box. Conceal all wiring from view inside wall, column or ceiling space. Wall or column mounted sensors: Locate 1500 mm above floor level. Sensors in unoccupied areas Installation: Conform to Devices in occupied areas except that devices may be mounted on surface mounted junction boxes with wiring in exposed conduit. 10 MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL

10.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General: Provide mechanical electrical installations. 10.2 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SYSTEMS Standards General: To AS/NZS 3000 Section 2 unless otherwise documented. 10.3 MOTORS AND STARTERS General General: Provide motors selected in conformance with AS 60034.1, the application load characteristics, motor manufacturers recommendations and the following: - Motors 0.75 kW: Three phase.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

161

September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

Rating Standard: To AS 60034.1. Maximum power rating: The greater of the documented minimum motor size and next preferred standard frame size above the maximum load of the driven equipment. Duty: S1. Class: continuous running. Speed: 1500 r/min. Starters General: To AS 60947.1. Electromechanical motor starters: To AS 60947.4.1. Selection General: Provide motor starters selected according to the following: - Electricity distribution network limitations for starting currents and voltage flicker. - Torque requirements for the motor load. - Heating effects on the motor. - Voltage drop during start due to starting currents. - Time required to accelerate from rest to full speed. - Number of starts per hour. 10.4 MOTOR PROTECTION General General: Provide over-current protection with manual reset giving overload protection in each phase of supply as part of the equipment assembly for each motor starter. Single phase motor protection General: Provide overload units matching the motor heating curve characteristics. 3-phase motor protection General: Provide thermal overload protection relays for each motor. 11 MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING

11.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General: Provide commissioning of all mechanical systems. 11.2 COMMISSIONING General General: When the installation is complete, commission the installation. Make the adjustments necessary to achieve the designated performance under continuous operating service conditions, including balancing, setting the controls, checking the operation of overload and safety devices, and correcting malfunctions. Reports General: Submit reports indicating observations and results of tests and compliance or noncompliance with requirements. 11.3 AIR BALANCING General General: Balance each air handling system. Completion: Balancing is complete when all the following conditions are met: - All air quantities are within the tolerances in Air quantity tolerance table. - Each air quantity measured deviates by less than the instrument accuracy from of the previous reading on the same component with the same instrument. - Resistance across the cooling coil bank (if present) is equal to the wetted coil resistance. - Resistance of the filter bank (if present) is equal to that of the filter when fully loaded with dirt. - For fans with variable speed drives, the frequency to the motor is 50 Hz.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 162 September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

- At least one outlet on each branch has its damper at the minimum pressure drop position. - At least one sub-branch damper is at the minimum pressure drop position. - At least one branch damper is at the minimum pressure drop position. - The fan speed or pitch angle is at the lowest value consistent with the above. Air quantity tolerances General: Balance air handling systems to the designated air quantities within the tolerances in the Air quantity tolerance table. For the purposes of the Air quantity tolerance table the following definitions apply: - Terminal: A supply, return or exhaust diffuser, grille or equivalent device discharging air into, or drawing air from, a space. - Sub-branch: A duct connected to one or more terminals. - Branch: A duct with no terminals connected to it. - Total air quantity: The sum of air flows to the connected terminals, branches or sub-branches under the conditions of measurement. Air quantity tolerance table Total air Branch air System type Terminal air quantity quantity quantity tolerance tolerance tolerance Low velocity supply, return or exhaust system +20% +10% +10% where all terminals on any one sub-branch serve -0% -0% -0% the same space +15% +10% +10% Low velocity supply, return or exhaust system -0% -0% -0% where the terminals on any one sub-branch serve more than one space 11.4 AUTOMATIC CONTROLS General General: Test all controls hardware and software for correct operation. Sensor calibration General: Calibrate all sensors to within the documented accuracy of the sensor. 11.5 SAFETY CONTROLS Testing General: Test each safety control and facility by simulating the unsafe condition that the control is intended to protect against. Monitoring: Make sure that monitoring and safety measures are in place for the test to protect personnel from injury and the building and equipment from damage. 12 MECHANICAL MAINTENANCE

12.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General: Provide maintenance of the mechanical systems. 12.2 STANDARDS General Air handling system maintenance: Maintain to AS 1851. Microbial control: Maintain to AS/NZS 3666.2 and AS/NZS 3666.3. 12.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Mechanical systems and equipment General: Provide operation and maintenance manuals for the whole of the mechanical work.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

163

September 2011

Melrose specification

Mechanical design and install

12.4 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS General General: Provide all labour and material necessary to maintain the mechanical installation including, but not limited, to filter media, belts, refrigerants, lubricants and all items commonly referred to as consumable. Site control General: Report to the principals designated representative on arriving at and before leaving the site. 12.5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE General General: Respond to call outs for breakdowns or other faults requiring corrective maintenance. Rectify faults and replace faulty materials and equipment. 12.6 REGULAR MAINTENANCE General General: Make routine service visits at the frequency documented. Service items of equipment in accordance with the maintenance schedules in the operation and maintenance manuals. 12.7 STATUTORY CERTIFICATION General Annual certification: Inspect and certify all items required to be inspected annually under statutory requirements including but not limited to air handling systems required for fire operation, boilers and pressure vessels. Submit certification to the principal. 12.8 MAINTENANCE RECORDS General General: Record maintenance undertaken. If available, record in the schedules provided as part of the maintenance manuals.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

164

September 2011

Melrose specification

Hydraulic design and install

HYDRAULIC DESIGN AND INSTALL

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide the hydraulic services summarised as follows: - Water heaters: As per hydraulic engineers specification and drawings - Subsoil drainage: As per hydraulic engineers specification and drawings - Stormwater: As per hydraulic engineers specification and drawings - Sanitary plumbing and drainage: As per hydraulic engineers specification and drawings - Cold water services: Connect the cold water supply system to the Network Utility Operator's main through a stop valve and meter. Provide the cold water installation from the meter to the draw-off points or connections to other services. - Hot water services: Provide the hot water installation from the cold water connection points to the draw-off points or connections to other services. - Rainwater storage systems: As per hydraulic engineers specification and drawings - Hose reel system: As per hydraulic engineers specification and drawings Authority submissions: Make submissions (including notices) to authorities relating to the works. Selections: As documented. Qualification: Use only appropriately experienced and qualified persons to undertake hydraulic design work. If requested, provide documents verifying the qualification and experience. Designer: Mott MacDonald Hughes Truemen 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. - Hydraulic engineers specification takes precedence - Service trenching. - Roofing combined for roof plumbing. 1.3 STANDARDS

General Plumbing and drainage: To AS/NZS 3500.0, AS/NZS 3500.1, AS/NZS 3500.2, AS/NZS 3500.3, AS/NZS 3500.4 and the Plumbing Code of Australia (PCA). Authorised products: Listed in the WaterMark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility Operator. Copper pipe and fittings-installation and commissioning: To AS 4809. Gas: To AS/NZS 5601.1. Microbial control: To AS/NZS 3666.1, AS/NZS 3666.2 and the recommendations of SAA/SNZ HB 32. Labelling Water efficiency labelling: Provide only products conforming to and labelled to the Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS). 1.4 INTERPRETATION

Abbreviations General: For the purposes of this worksection the following abbreviations apply: - LPG: Liquefied petroleum gas. Definitions General: For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply:

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

165

September 2011

Melrose specification

Hydraulic design and install

- Network Utility Operator: A person who undertakes the piped distribution of drinking water or natural gas for supply or is the operator of a sewerage system or a stormwater system. - Hot-dip galvanized: Zinc coated to AS/NZS 4680 after fabrication with coating thickness and mass to AS/NZS 4680 Table 1. 2 2.1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS DESIGN

Extent Requirement: Provide additional design work necessary to complete the documented hydraulic services. 2.2 INSPECTION

Notice Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Excavated surfaces. - Concealed or underground services. 2.3 SUBMISSIONS

Drawings Standard: To AS 1100.101, AS 1100.201, AS 1100.301, AS 1100.401 and AS/NZS 1100.501 as applicable. Requirement: Submit detail drawings at minimum 1:100 scale, showing the following: - Pipework and equipment layout and sections showing the work to be installed on the level that the services are installed. Do not submit glass floor drawings. - Long sections of below ground drainage. - Riser layouts and sections. - Piping and other schematic drawings including numbering of each valve to correspond to valve tags notation. - Inclusions: Include the following on the drawings: . Access openings, cover plates, valve boxes and access pits. . Details of control panels including control and power diagrams. . Insulation of piping, fittings and tanks. . Location, capacity, type and other relevant details of water heaters, including supports and safe trays. . Location, type, grade and finish of piping, fittings, valves, meters and pipe supports. . On-site detention pondage areas. . Provision of a temporary fire hydrant service in the construction period. . Provision of blue metal back fill to seepage drain system. . Provision of erosion control measures. . Provision of road barriers and lighting. . Provision of site treatment and fire vehicle parking as required adjacent to the fire hydrant booster inlet valve station. . Provision of temporary sanitary accommodation for construction workers. . Provision of trafficable cover plates in the public domain. . Relevant survey levels. . Site and floor set out points. . Tank stands and supporting structures. Technical data Certification: Submit certification that the plant and equipment submitted meets the requirements and capacities of the contract documents except for departures that are identified in the submission. Submissions: Submit technical data for all items of plant and equipment.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

166

September 2011

Melrose specification

Hydraulic design and install

2.4

INSTALLATION

Accessories General: Provide the accessories and fittings necessary for the proper functioning of the systems, including taps, valves, outlets, pressure and temperature control devices, strainers, gauges and pumps. Isolating valves: In addition to valves required to meet statutory requirements, provide valves so that isolation of parts of the system for safe isolation of the system in the event of leaks or maintenance causes a minimum of inconvenience to building occupants. Connections to Network Utility Operator mains General: Excavate to locate and expose the connection points and connect to the Network Utility Operator mains. On completion, backfill and compact the excavation and reinstate surfaces and elements which have been disturbed such as roads, pavements, kerbs, footpaths and nature strips. 2.5 PAINTING, FINISHES MARKING

Finishes General: Finish exposed piping, including fittings and supports, as follows: - In internal locations such as toilet and kitchen areas: Chrome plate copper piping to AS 1192 service condition 2, bright. - Externally and steel piping and iron fittings internally: Paint. - In concealed but accessible spaces (including cupboards and non-habitable enclosed spaces): Leave copper and plastic unpainted except for identification marking. Prime steel piping and iron fittings. - Valves: Finish valves to match connected piping. 3 3.1 SANITARY FIXTURES RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide sanitary fixtures. Selections: As documented. 3.2 STANDARDS

Authorised products Standard: Listed in the WaterMark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility Operator. Standards Sanitary fixtures: To ATS 5200. Design for access and mobility: AS 1428.1, AS 1428.2 and AS 1428.3. Labelling Water efficiency labelling: Provide only products conforming to and labelled to the Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS). 4 4.1 TAPWARE RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide tapware. Selections: As documented. 4.2 STANDARDS

Authorised products Standard: Listed in the WaterMark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility Operator. Standards Tapware: To ATS 5200.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 167 September 2011

Melrose specification

Hydraulic design and install

Design for access and mobility: AS 1428.1, AS 1428.2 and AS 1428.3. Labelling Water efficiency labelling: Provide only products conforming to and labelled to the Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS). 5 5.1 WATER HEATERS GENERAL

General General: Provide water heaters. Selections: As documented. 5.2 ELECTRIC STORAGE WATER HEATERS

Standard General: To AS/NZS 4692.1. Energy performance: To AS/NZS 4692.2. Tariff General: Install so that the heating system qualifies for the tariff concession or subsidy offered by the statutory authority. 5.3 GAS STORAGE WATER HEATERS

Standard General: To AS/NZS 5601.1. Energy performance: To AS/NZS 4552.2. 5.4 SOLAR WATER HEATERS

Description General: Provide a proprietary automatic water heater comprising solar collector and storage container and including connections, controls and necessary fittings. Standard General: To AS/NZS 2712. 5.5 HEAT PUMP WATER HEATERS

Description General: Provide a proprietary automatic water heater comprising self-contained reverse cycle heating system and storage container, including connections, controls and necessary fittings. Standard General: To AS/NZS 2712. Performance evaluation: To AS/NZS 5125.1. 6 6.1 STORMWATER BUILDINGS GENERAL

General General: Provide stormwater installation. Selections: As documented. 6.2 STORMWATER DRAINS

Location General: Provide stormwater drains to connect downpipes, surface drains, subsoil drains and drainage pits to the outlet point or point of connection. Make sure that location of piping will not interfere with other services and building elements not yet installed or built. Subject to the preceding and documented layouts, follow the most direct route with the least number of changes in direction. Downpipe connections: Turn up branch pipelines with bends to meet the downpipe, finishing 50 mm (nominal) above finished ground or pavement level. Seal joints between downpipes and drains.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

168

September 2011

Melrose specification

Hydraulic design and install

Laying General: Lay in straight lines between changes in direction or grade with sockets pointing up hill. If other pipes are adjacent, set each pipe true to line and complete each joint before laying the next pipe. If work is not continuous cap open ends to prevent entry of foreign matter. Pipe underlay General: Bed piping on a continuous underlay of bedding material, at least 75 mm thick after compaction. Grade the underlay evenly to the gradient of the pipeline. Chases: If necessary, form chases to prevent projections such as sockets and flanges from bearing on the trench bottom or underlay. Pipe surrounds General: Place the material in the pipe surround in layers 200 mm loose thickness, and compact without damaging or displacing the piping. Anchor blocks General: If necessary to restrain lateral and axial movement of the stormwater pipes provide reinforced concrete anchor blocks at junctions and changes of grade or direction. Thermal movement General: Arrange piping to accommodate thermal expansion. Provide proprietary expansion joints in copper and plastic pipes where pipe flexibility is not sufficient to absorb movement. Make sure that movement does not strain branch connections. 6.3 SUBSOIL DRAINS

General General: Provide subsoil drains to intercept groundwater seepage and prevent water build-up behind walls and under floors and pavements. Connect subsoil drains to surface drains or to the stormwater drainage system as applicable. Trench width: 450 mm. Pipe depth: Provide the following minimum clear depths, measured to the crown of the pipe, where the pipe passes below the following elements: - 100 mm below formation level of the pavement, kerb or channel. - 100 mm below the average gradient of the bottom of footings. - 450 mm below the finished surface of unpaved ground. Jointing General: At junctions of subsoil pipes provide tees, couplings or adaptors to AS 2439.1. Pipe underlay General: Grade the trench floor evenly to the gradient of the pipeline. If the trench floor is rock, correct any irregularities with compacted bedding material. Bed piping on a continuous underlay of bedding material, at least 75 mm thick after compaction. Lay the pipe with one line of perforations at the bottom. Chases: If necessary, form chases to prevent projections such as sockets and flanges from bearing on the trench bottom or underlay. Pipe surrounds General: Place the material in the pipe surround in layers 200 mm loose thickness, and compact without damaging or displacing the piping. Depth of overlay: - To the underside of the bases of overlying structures such as pavements, slabs and channels. - To within 150 mm of the finished surface of unpaved or landscaped areas. Geotextiles General: Provide polymeric fabric formed from plastic yarn composed of at least 85% by weight propylene, ethylene amide or vinyledenechloride and containing stabilisers or inhibitors which provide resistance to deterioration due to ultraviolet light. Marking: To AS 3705. Protection: Provide heavy duty protective covering. Store clear of the ground and out of direct sunlight. During installation do not expose the filter fabric to sunlight for more than 14 days.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

169

September 2011

Melrose specification

Hydraulic design and install

Filter socks General: Provide polyester permeable socks capable of retaining particles of 0.25 mm size. Securely fit or join the sock at each joint. 6.4 PITS

Finish to exposed surfaces General: Provide a smooth, seamless finish, using steel trowelled render or concrete cast in steel forms. Corners: Cove or splay internal corners. Metal access covers and grates Standard: To AS 3996. Cover levels: Top of cover or grate, including frame: - In paved areas: Flush with the paving surface. - In landscaped areas: 25 mm above finished surface. - Gratings taking surface water runoff: Locate to receive runoff without ponding. 6.5 TESTING

Pre-completion tests General: Before backfilling or concealing, carry out the following tests: - Downpipes within buildings: Air or water pressure test to AS/NZS 3500.3 Section 10. - Site stormwater drains and main internal drains: Air or water pressure test to AS/NZS 3500.3 Section 10. - Rising mains from pumped discharge: Water pressure test to AS/NZS 3500.3 Section 10. Leaks: If leaks are found, rectify and re-test. 6.6 COMPLETION

Cleaning General: Clean and flush the whole installation. 7 7.1 WASTEWATER GENERAL

General General: Provide sanitary plumbing and drainage. Selections: As documented. 7.2 SANITARY PLUMBING

Location General: Verify location and invert of piping before commencing installation. Make sure that location of piping will not interfere with other services and building elements not yet installed or built. Subject to the preceding and documented layouts, follow the most direct route with the least number of changes in direction. Ducts: If installed in ducts, locate and fix stacks, wastes and pipes independently of other services. Arrange so they are easily accessible and removable throughout their entire length. Discharge from air handling systems Trays, sumps and plumbing: To AS/NZS 3666.1. Thermal movement General: Arrange piping to accommodate thermal expansion. Provide proprietary expansion joints in copper and plastic pipes where pipe flexibility is not sufficient to absorb movement. Make sure that movement does not strain branch connections. Vent pipes General: Staying to roof: If fixings for stays penetrate the roof covering, seal the penetrations and make watertight. Terminations: Provide vent cowls of the same material as the vent pipe.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

170

September 2011

Melrose specification

Hydraulic design and install

Wet area floors General: Where drainage connections pass through wet area floors, terminate 4 mm below the substrate surface. 7.3 SANITARY DRAINAGE

Laying General: Lay in straight lines between changes in direction or grade with sockets pointing up hill. If other pipes are adjacent, set each pipe true to line and complete each joint before laying the next pipe. If work is not continuous cap open ends to prevent entry of foreign matter. 7.4 PIPING

Finishes General: Finish exposed piping, including fittings and supports, as follows: - In internal locations such as toilet and kitchen areas: Chrome plate copper piping to AS 1192 service condition 2, bright. - Externally, and steel piping and iron fittings internally: Paint. - In concealed but accessible spaces (including cupboards and non-habitable enclosed spaces): Leave copper and plastic unpainted except for identification marking. Prime steel piping and iron fittings. Valves: Finish valves to match connected piping. 7.5 TESTS

Pre-completions tests Before backfilling or concealing: Test to AS/NZS 3500.2 Section 13. Leaks: If leaks are found, rectify and re-test. 7.6 COMPLETION

Cleaning General: On completion clean and flush the whole installation. 8 8.1 COLD HEATED WATER RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide cold water and heated water systems. Selections: As documented. 8.2 PRODUCTS

Backflow prevention devices Standard: To AS/NZS 2845.1 and AS 2845.2. Water tanks General: To ATS 5200.026. Materials: To AS/NZS 3500.1. Polyethylene water tanks: To AS/NZS 4766. Temperature: Do not exceed the rated service temperature of the tank material. Flywire: Provide plastic flywire covering to overflow and vent pipes. Water meters Standard: To the AS 3565.1 and AS 3565.4. Installation: To the requirements of the Network Utility Operator. 8.3 PIPING

Location Mains connection: Connect the cold water supply system to the Network Utility Operator's main through a stop valve and meter. Cold water system: Provide the cold water supply system, installed from the meter to the draw-off points or connections to other services.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 171 September 2011

Melrose specification

Hydraulic design and install

Heated water system: Provide the heated water system, installed from the cold water connection points to the draw-off points or connections to other services. Finishes General: Finish exposed piping, including fittings, cover plates and supports, as follows: - Chrome plate copper piping to AS 1192 service condition 2, bright in internal locations such as toilet and kitchen areas: - Paint external above ground piping, and internal steel piping and iron fittings exposed to view. - In concealed but accessible spaces (including cupboards and non-habitable enclosed spaces): Leave copper and plastic unpainted except for identification marking. Prime steel piping and iron fittings. - Valves: Finish valves to match connected piping. Fittings and accessories General: Provide the fittings necessary for the proper functioning of the water supply system, including taps, valves, backflow prevention devices, pressure and temperature control devices, strainers, gauges and automatic controls and alarms. Provision for dismantling: Arrange piping by the provision of unions or similar so that valves, taps and other maintainable components can be removed for maintenance without disturbing or cutting adjacent piping. Pipes under pressure embedded in concrete General: Use only copper pipe and the minimum number of joints. Pressure test and rectify leaks before the concrete is poured. 8.4 TESTING

Pre-completion tests Pressure tests: Before insulation is applied to joints pressure test piping to AS/NZS 3500.1 and AS/NZS 3500.4 as appropriate. If leaks are found, rectify and re-test. Cross connections: Isolate systems individually and check for cross connections. Backflow prevention: To AS/NZS 3500.1. Tapware: Check for leaks. Completion test General: Provide a full operational test to verify compliance with documented requirements. 8.5 COMPLETION

Commissioning Strainers: Remove, clean and replace strainer baskets. Cleaning: To AS/NZS 3500.1 Appendix H. Disinfection: Disinfect to AS/NZS 3500.1 Appendix I. Cold water systems: Test and commission to AS/NZS 3500.1 Section 16. Heated water systems: Test and commission to AS/NZS 3500.4 Section 11. Testable backflow prevention devices: Test and commission to AS 2845.3 by a licensed plumber with backflow device accreditation. Tag and certify to the requirements of the Network Utility Operator. Charging Completion: On completion of installation, commissioning, testing and disinfection, fill the system with water, turn on control and isolating valves and the energy supply and leave the water supply system in full operational condition. Maintenance Heated water systems: To AS/NZS 3500.4 Section 12 and AS/NZS 3666.2. Maintenance manuals: To AS/NZS 3666.2. 9 9.1 FUEL GAS RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide fuel gas installations.


NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 172 September 2011

Melrose specification

Hydraulic design and install

Gas type: As documented. 9.2 STANDARDS

Reticulated gas systems General: To AS/NZS 5601.1. Gas equipment Standard: To AS 3645. Industrial and commercial gas-fired appliances General: To AS 3814. Steel mains and services Maximum operating pressure not more than 1050 kPa: To AS/NZS 4645.2. Flue cowls General: To AS 4566. 9.3 PIPING

Concealment General: If practicable, install piping so that it is concealed within service ducts or non-habitable enclosed spaces and does not appear on external walls. Otherwise, provide metal piping mounted on metal brackets and provide metal cover plates at penetrations. Finishes General: Finish exposed piping, including fittings and supports, as follows: - In internal locations such as toilet and kitchen areas: Chrome plate copper piping to AS 1192 service condition 2, bright. - Externally, and steel piping and iron fittings internally: Paint. - In concealed but accessible spaces (including cupboards and non-habitable enclosed spaces): Leave copper and plastic unpainted except for identification marking. Prime steel piping and iron fittings. Valves: Finish valves to match connected piping. 9.4 LPG STORAGE SYSTEMS

Tank LPG storage Tank colour: White. Certificate holders: Provide a galvanized steel pipe, one end fitted with a brass plug, one end threaded and fitted with a threaded brass cap. Weld to the tank support member. Cylinder LPG storage Fittings: Supply cylinders with regulators which have AGA/ALPGA approval. Hoods General: Provide a weatherproof protective steel cover to the valve and regulators of 450 L capacity cylinders, together with hinge pins, padlock and key. Function: For storage of current storage system approval and test certificates. Marking: Mark the threaded cap with the phrase LPG CERTIFICATES. Notices and signs General: Required. 9.5 MANUALS

General General: Submit recommendations for the operation, care and maintenance of gas appliances, storage tanks, valves, regulators and their associated fittings. 9.6 COMMISSIONING

General General: On completion of installation and testing, turn on isolating and control valves, and purge and charge the system. Purging: Comply with the recommendations of AS/NZS 5601.1 Appendix D. Appliances: Commission appliances.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 173 September 2011

Melrose specification

Hydraulic design and install

Charging Immediately before the date of practical completion: Fully charge the system with gas. LPG systems: Fill gas storage containers and replace gas used in testing. 10 RAINWATER STORAGE SYSTEMS

10.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General: Provide rainwater storage systems and ancillaries. Selections: As documented. 10.2 STANDARDS General Metal tanks and rainwater goods: To AS/NZS 2179.1. Design and installation: To the recommendations of SAA HB 230. 10.3 SUBMISSIONS Manufacturer's warranty General: Submit the tank manufacturer's warranty naming the Principal as warrantee. Include a copy of the warranty in the operation and maintenance manual. 10.4 RAINWATER TANKS General General: Provide structurally sound and watertight tanks. Openings: Designed to resist human load bearing forces and to prevent the inappropriate entry of humans, animals, insects surface water, ground water and rubbish. Accessories: Provide the accessories needed to complete the installation, including inlet and outlet connections, and flywire screened overflow and access opening. Accessory materials: Select from: - Ultraviolet light resistant plastic. - Corrosion resistant metal. Do not use copper or copper alloys with metallic coated steel tanks. - The same material as the tank. Access opening: Provide a vermin proof, child proof access opening above the high water level and cover with either a strainer or a lid fixed securely to the tank. Accessories: Include the following: - Floating outlet to draw water from the upper part of the tank. - Tight fitting lids or screens with 1 mm mesh at all openings. - Flap valves at every opening to the tank. - Calmed inlet to the tank to prevent stirring sediment. - Overflow siphon to skim surface contaminants. - Warranty: Provide a manufacturers warranty on the tanks. Tanks and accessories for potable water Standard: If the tank is to contain potable water, conform to AS 2070 with testing of materials to AS/NZS 4020. AS 2070 covers plastics including linings of metallic coated steel tanks. 10.5 POLYETHYLENE TANKS General Standard: To AS/NZS 4766. 10.6 COATED STEEL TANKS Roof Type: Select from the following: - Conical.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 174 September 2011

Melrose specification

Hydraulic design and install

- Flat and back propped internally with a tightly fitting length of PVC-U downpipe. Material General: Conform to the following: - Top and sides: Metallic-coated steel with polymer film to AS 2070 on the inside and prepainted on the outside. - Base: Metallic-coated steel with polymer film to AS 2070 on inside and outside. 10.7 FIRST FLUSH DIVERTER General General: Provide a first flush diverter. Arrange to drain completely. Sizing: Select for 20 L/100 m2 rainwater catchment area. Construction: Corrosion resistant and compatible with the rainwater plumbing and tank. Discharge: Discharge waste water from the first flush diverter either: - If permitted by the local authority, onto grassed areas away from tank and building footings. - To the stormwater installation. 10.8 RAINWATER FILTRATION Tank inlet General: Provide an easily cleanable filter to treat rainwater prior to the entry to the tank. Mesh size: 1 mm. Tank outlet Filtration and treatment: As documented. Drinking water filters: To AS/NZS 3497 and the requirements of the statutory authorities having jurisdiction. 10.9 PUMPS General General: Provide pumps as documented. 10.10 INSTALLATION General General: Provide structural support to withstand the mass of the tank when full without deformation or excessive settling. Connecting piping: Support independently of the tank. Provide a 300 mm long section of reinforced flexible hose to prevent piping exerting a load on the tank. Overflow: Pipe to discharge away from the tank. Arrangement: Prevent the entry of sunlight to the interior of the tank. 10.11 ABOVE GROUND TANK INSTALLATION General Restraint: Restrain the tank to prevent movement, when empty, caused by wind and other loads. Base: Provide a level base with gaps not exceeding 10 mm, free of sharp projections and projecting beyond the edge of the tank at all points. Polyethylene tanks Support: Trim and compact the ground and place a level bed of sand at least 50 mm thick. Coated steel tanks Support: Fully support the tank on a self draining timber or concrete base. Corrosion protection: - Prevent contact with dissimilar metals. - Arrange so that no part of the tank is below ground level and so that adjacent ground surfaces fall away from the tank. - Do not use sharp objects inside the tank. Remove swarf with a magnet if drilling or cutting. Bladder tanks Support: Locate on level base free from sharp objects. Install with manufacturer's supporting frame.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 175 September 2011

Melrose specification

Hydraulic design and install

Relief: Provide over-pressurising relief and air vent. 10.12 COMMISSIOINING General Cleaning: Flush the rainwater system. Wash and flush tanks to remove manufacturing and other contaminants. 10.13 MAINTENANCE Annual maintenance Requirement: Provide the annual maintenance to SAA HB 230 Table 10.1 at the following times: - If the defects liability period is less than 12 months: Within one month before the end of the end of the defects liability period. - If the defects liability period is 12 months or longer: Annually. 11 HOSE REELS

11.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General: Provide hose reels. Selections: As documented. 11.2 STANDARDS General Design, construction and performance: To AS/NZS 1221. Installation: To AS 2441. 11.3 AUTHORISED PRODUCTS General General: Provide equipment listed in the ActivFire Register of Fire Protection Equipment. 11.4 FIRE HOSE REELS General Standard: To AS/NZS 1221. Certification: Required. Certification provider: An organisation accredited by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand (JAS-ANZ). Type: Swivel hose guide. 11.5 INSTALLATION Fire hose reels Standard: To AS 2441. Protection from damage: To AS 2441. 11.6 COMMISSIONING General General: Test to verify conformance to AS 2441. Results: Submit commissioning and testing results. Completion tests are dealt with in AS 2441 clause 11. 11.7 MAINTENANCE Fire hose reels General: To AS 1851. Water conservation General: Conform to the recommendations of SAA HB 233.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

176

September 2011

Melrose specification

Hydraulic design and install

12

SELECTIONS

12.1 SUBMISSIONS Samples schedule Sample required Details and inclusions

12.2 COMPONENTS Appliance schedule As per hydraulic engineers specification and drawings Fire hose reel schedule As per hydraulic engineers specification and drawings Sanitary fixtures schedule As per the schedule of fixtures and fittings Water heater schedule As per the schedule of fixtures and fittings Rainwater tank schedule As per the schedule of fixtures and fittings 12.3 LPG STORAGE LPG storage systems schedule As per the schedule of fixtures and fittings

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

177

September 2011

Electrical

Electrical design and install

ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND INSTALL

1 1.1

GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide the electrical systems as per the electrical engineers specification and drawings Qualification General: Use only an appropriately experienced and qualified designer to undertake the electrical design work on the systems documented. Performance General: Carry out verification tests and measurements to show compliance with the documentation. 1.2 CROSS REFERENCES

General Requirement: Conform to the following: - General requirements. - Service trenching. 1.3 STANDARDS

General General: To AS/NZS 3000 Part 2 unless otherwise documented. Electrical systems: To AS/NZS 3008.1.1 and SAA HB 301. Degrees of protection (IP code): To AS 60529. EMC: To AS/NZS 61000. Telecommunications systems: To AS/ACIF S008, AS/ACIF S009, AS/NZS 3080, SAA HB 243 and SAA HB 29. 1.4 EXECUTION

General Arrangement: Arrange services so that services running together are parallel with each other and with adjacent building elements. Fixing: If non-structural building elements are not suitable for fixing equipment and services to, fix directly to structure and trim around holes or penetrations in non-structural elements. Installation: Install equipment and services plumb, fix securely and organise reticulated services neatly. Allow for movement in both structure and services. Lifting: Provide heavy items of equipment with permanent fixtures for lifting as recommended by the manufacturer. Suspended ground floors: Keep all parts of services under suspended ground floors > 150 mm clear of the ground surface. Make sure services do not impede access. Submissions Samples: Provide samples of all accessories and luminaires. Technical data: Submit documentation to fully describe the proposed installation. Installation of accessories General: Install accessories and conceal cabling in walls in conformance with the following: Rendered masonry partition: Flush wall box with conduit chased into wall. Double sided face brick partition: Vertically mounted flush wall box with conduit concealed in cut bricks. Face brick external cavity wall: Flush wall box with thermoplastic insulated cables in conduit run in cavity and tied against inner brick surface, or thermoplastic sheathed cables run in cavity. Stud partition: Flush plate secured to proprietary support bracket or wall box Location: Confirm the final location of all outlets and equipment on site before installation.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 178 September 2011

Electrical

Electrical design and install

Spacing from adjacent horizontal surface: 75 mm to the centre of accessory socket. Default mounting heights to centre of accessory plate: - Outlets: 300 mm. - Switches and controls: 1100 mm. Flush mounting: Provide flush mounted accessories except in plant rooms. Common face plates: Mount adjacent flush mounted accessories under a common faceplate. Restricted location: Do not install wall boxes across junctions of wall finishes. Surface mounting: Proprietary mounting blocks. Installation of ceiling mounted appliances Connections - Appliances: Provide flush mounted outlets on the ceiling next to support brackets. Connections - Fixed equipment: Provide concealed permanent connections. Mounting: Mount appliances independent of ceiling tiles and suspended ceiling material. Fixing: For equipment and appliances heavier than 30 kg provide support through the suspended ceiling to the building structure. Brace appliances that have excessive bending moments, are heavy or vibrate, to prevent horizontal movement. Manuals General: Conform to the Operation and maintenance manuals clause in the General requirements worksection. Certification General: Submit certification that the plant and equipment submitted meets all requirements and capacities of the contract documents except for departures that are identified in the submission. 1.5 MARKING AND LABELLING

General General: Provide labels including control and circuit equipment ratings, functional units, notices for operational and maintenance personnel, incoming and outgoing circuit rating, sizes and origin of supply and kW ratings of motor starters. Identifying labels General: Provide labels fixed to access panels, doors, covers and escutcheon panels and internal equipment, indicating the relevant worksection and component. Single-line diagrams Custom-built assemblies: Provide single-line diagrams. Format: Non-fading print, at least A3 size, showing the situation as installed. Mounting: Enclose in a non-reflective PVC frame and wall mount close to assembly. Marking cables General: Identify the origin of all wiring by means of legible indelible marking. Identification labels: Provide durable labels fitted to each core and sheath, permanently marked with numbers, letters or both to suit the connection diagrams. Multicore cables and trefoil groups: Identify at each end with durable non-ferrous tags clipped around each cable or trefoil group. Telecommunications and television cabling General: Label telecommunications cables, cross connects and outlets in conformance with the requirements of AS/NZS 3080, and SAA HB 29 Figures 5-18. Labels: Label cables to indicate the origin and destination of the cable. Label outlets to show the origin of the cross connect, the workstation or outlet number, and the port designation. Location marking General: Accurately mark the location of underground cables with route markers consisting of a marker plate set flush in a concrete base. Location: Place markers at each joint, route junction, change of direction, termination and building entry point and in straight runs at intervals of not more than 100 m. Concrete bases: 200 mm diameter x 200 mm deep, minimum. Direction marking: Show the direction of the cable run by means of direction arrows on the marker plate. Indicate distance to the next marker.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 179 September 2011

Electrical

Electrical design and install

Plates: Brass, aluminium or mild steel hot-dipped galvanized minimum size 75 x 75 x 1 mm thick. Plate fixing: Waterproof adhesive and 4 brass or stainless steel countersunk screws. Marker height: Set the marker plate flush with paved surfaces, and 25 mm above other surfaces. Marker tape for electrical services: Where electric bricks or covers are not provided over underground wiring, provide a 150 mm wide yellow or orange marker tape bearing the words WARNING electric cable buried below, laid in the trench 150 mm below ground level. Labelling minimum lettering heights Main assembly designation: 25 mm. Distribution assembly designations: 15 mm. Small proprietary distribution boards: 10 mm. Main switches: 10 mm. Outgoing functional units: 8 mm. Identifying labels (on outside of cabinet rear covers): 4 mm. Danger, warning and caution notices: 10 mm for main heading, 5 mm for remainder. Other labels including equipment labels within cabinets: 3 mm. Label colours Generally: Black lettering on white background except as follows: - Main switch and caution labels: Red lettering on white background. - Danger, warning labels: White lettering on red background. Fixing General: Fix labels securely. Fixing methods: Use screws and double-sided adhesive. Fixed in extruded aluminium sections attached to panels with rivets or countersunk screws. Aluminium labels: Aluminium or monel rivets. Restrictions: Do not use self-tapping or thread-cutting screws. Permanent fixing: Fix labels permanently in place. Label fixing table Component Fixing scheme Type Cables Origin and destination Self adhesive wrap on Cross connects Port number Proprietary Outlets SAA HB 29 Figs 5-18 Engraved plate Wall boxes SAA HB 29 Figs 5-18 Engraved adhesive label Patch cords Type of service Colour code

2 2.1

LOW VOLTAGE POWER SYSTEMS RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide a complete operational low voltage power system, comprising the following and as documented: - Supply from network distributor. - Metering. - Consumers mains. - Submains. - Final subcircuits. 2.2 SUBMISSIONS Technical data: Submit documentation to fully describe the proposed installation. As a minimum provide: - Single line diagram(s).
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 180 September 2011

Electrical

Electrical design and install

Fault levels at switchboards. Maximum demand calculations. Cable and conductor cross sectional area and insulation type. Submain cable routes and support or enclosure method. Switchboard cupboard layouts including risers. Busduct systems including routes, dimensions and connection details. Certify compliance with AS/NZS 3000, for electrical services. WIRING SYSTEMS

2.3

General Standard: To AS/NZS 3013. Selection: Provide wiring systems appropriate to the installation conditions and the function of the load. 2.4 POWER CABLES

Cable General: Copper cable generally, multi-stranded except for MIMS. Minimum size: Conform to the following: - Lighting subcircuits: 1.5 mm2. - Power subcircuits: 2.5 mm2. - Submains: 6 mm2. Voltage drop: Install final subcircuit cables within the voltage drop parameters dictated by the route length and load. Fault loop impedance: Provide final subcircuit cables selected to satisfy the requirements for automatic disconnection under short-circuit and earth fault/touch voltage conditions. Cable systems: Provide the following: - Walls filled with bulk thermal insulation: Install cables in PVC conduit. 2.5 ACCESSORIES General: Provide the following and as documented: - General power outlets. - Isolating switches. - Three phase outlets. 2.6 COMPLETION TESTS

Dummy load tests General: If electrical tests are required and the actual load is not available, provide a dummy load equal to at least 75% of the design load. 3 3.1 SWITCHBOARD RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide proprietary switchboards to the following and as documented: - Main switchboard. - Distribution boards. Rated short-circuit currents: Design for the maximum prospective symmetrical r.m.s. current values at rated operational voltage, at each assembly incoming supply terminal, excluding effects of current limiting devices. 3.2 STANDARDS

General Standard: To AS/NZS 3439.1 and AS/NZS 3439.3.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

181

September 2011

Electrical

Electrical design and install

Statutory authoritys equipment General: Refer to network distributor service rules to determine their requirements. Install equipment supplied by the network distributor, and provide wiring to complete the installation. Rated short-circuit currents General: The rated fault capacity of the assembly enclosure, busbars and outgoing protective devices is equal to the fault level of the system at the assembly. Busbars General: Incorporate proprietary insulated busbar systems for the interconnection of isolators, circuit breakers and other circuit protective devices. Earthing General: Make provision for connection of communications systems CET at switchboard earth bar to AS/ACIF S009. Doors General: Provide lockable doors with a circuit card holder unless enclosed in cupboards or in an area which is not readily accessible to the public. IP rating General: IP52 minimum. Weatherproof: IP56 minimum. Finishes Interior: White. Exterior: Manufacturers standard finish. Supporting structure Assemblies: Conform to the following: - Wall mounted: 2 m2. - Floor mounted: Assemblies > 2 m2. Ventilation General: Required to maintain design operating temperatures at full load. 4 4.1 SWITCHBOARD COMPONENTS RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide switchboard components as follows and as documented. Protective devices General: Select and adjust protective devices to grade and coordinate for overcurrent, and earth faults. 4.2 SWITCH-ISOLATOR AND COMBINATION FUSE-SWITCH UNITS Standard: To AS 60947.1 and AS/NZS 3947.3. Rated current: To suit unit installed in enclosure. Rated fault capacity: Provide units selected for short-circuit making capacity that is at least the fault level at assembly incoming terminals. Breaking capacity: At least the rated full load current. Rated duty: Uninterrupted in non-ventilated enclosure. Operation: Independent manual operation including positive ON/OFF indicator. Locking: Provide for padlocking in the OFF position. Handles: Removable only when switch is in open position. Fuse links: Isolated when switch contacts are open. 4.3 MOULDED CASE AND MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS Moulded case breakers: To AS 60947.1, AS 2184 and AS 60947.2. Miniature circuit breakers: To AS/NZS 60898.1 or AS/NZS 3111. Trip type: Conform to the following:
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 182 September 2011

Electrical

Electrical design and install

- Moulded case breakers: Adjustable thermal, fixed magnetic. - Miniature circuit breakers: Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic. Current limiting: - Moulded case breakers: required. Fault capacity 10 kA: To AS 60947.2 and AS 60947.1. Fault capacity < 10 kA, current rating < 100 A: Miniature overcurrent circuit breakers to AS/NZS 60898.1 or AS/NZS 3111. Mounting: Mount circuit breakers so that the ON/OFF and current rating indications are clearly visible with covers or escutcheons in position. Align operating toggles of each circuit breaker in the same plane. Clip tray chassis: For miniature overcurrent circuit breakers provide clip tray assemblies capable of accepting single, double, or triple circuit breakers, and related busbars. Provide moulded clip-on pole fillers for unused portions. 4.4 RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES Integral type: Incorporate earth leakage in circuit breaker protection operation to AS/NZS 61009.1. Maximum tripping current: 30 mA. 4.5 FUSES WITH ENCLOSED FUSE LINKS

General Standards: To AS 60269.1, AS 60269.2.0 and AS 60269.2.1. Fault level: Provide fuses suitable for the fault level at the assembly, and which discriminate with other protective equipment. Let-through energy and peak cut-off current: To suit protected equipment. Utilisation category: Distribution/general purpose: gG. Fuse-holders: Mount fuse-holders so that fuse carriers may be withdrawn directly towards the operator and away from live parts. Provide fixed insulation which shrouds live metal when the fuse carrier is withdrawn. Barriers: Provide barriers on both sides of each fuse link, preventing inadvertent electrical contact between phases by the insertion of screwdriver. Fuse links: Enclosed, high rupturing capacity type mounted in a fuse carrier. If necessary for safe removal and insertion of the fuse carrier, provide extraction handles. Mount on clips within the spares cabinet. Identification: Clearly indicate Australian manufacturer or distributor. 4.6 CONTACTORS Standard: To AS 60947.4.1. Rated operational current: The greater of: - Full load current of the load controlled. - 16 A. Contacts life: 1 million operations at AC-3 or DC-3. Mounting: Mount with sufficient clearance to allow full access for maintenance, removal and replacement of coils and contacts, without the need to disconnect wiring or remove other equipment. Auxiliary contacts: Provide auxiliary contacts with at least one normally-open and one normally-closed separate contacts with rating of 6 A at 230 V a.c. Interconnection: Do not connect contactors in series or parallel to achieve ratings. 5 5.1 LIGHTING RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide a complete operational lighting system, tested and commissioned.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

183

September 2011

Electrical

Electrical design and install

5.2

STANDARDS

Standards Interior lighting standard: To AS/NZS 1680.0, AS/NZS 1680.1, AS/NZS 1680.2.1,AS/NZS 1680.2.2, AS/NZS 1680.2.3, AS/NZS 1680.2.4,AS/NZS 1680.2.5 and AS 1680.3 Exterior lighting standard: To AS/NZS 1158.0, AS/NZS 1158.1.1, AS/NZS 1158.1.2, AS/NZS 1158.2, AS/NZS 1158.3.1 and AS/ NZS 1158.4. Proprietary equipment: Provide only proprietary luminaires, fittings and accessories. Modifications and refurbishing: Carry out to the original manufacturers standards. Minimum energy performance standards (MEPS) General: To AS/NZS 4783.2 and AS/NZS 4782.2. Self-ballasted lamps: To AS/NZS 4847.2. 5.3 LAMPS

General Lamps: Provide all luminaires complete with lamps and accessories. Verify operation: Install lamps in all luminaries and verify correct operation Low voltage lamps: Provide lamps strictly in conformance with the luminaire manufacturers recommendation. Dichroic lamps: Provide dichroic lamps with integral reflector. Standards Fluorescent: To AS/NZS 4782.1. Tungsten halogen: To IEC 60357. 5.4 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM General: Provide the following as documented: - Lighting switches. - Dimmers. - Automatic control systems. Documentation: Provide complete technical and operational documentation for the lighting control system. 5.5 INSTALLATION

General Supports: Mount luminaires on proprietary supports by means of battens, trims, noggings, roses or packing material to suit location. Recessed luminaires support: To AS 2946. 5.6 COMPLETION

General Requirement: Before the date of practical completion, carry out the following: - Verify the operation of all luminaires. - Replace lamps which have been in service at practical completion for a period greater than 50% of the lamp life as published by the lamp manufacturer. 6 6.1 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING

General General: Provide a complete operational telecommunications cabling system, tested and commissioned in conformance with AS/NZS 3080, AS/ACIF S009, SAA HB 29 and as appropriate SAA HB 252.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

184

September 2011

Electrical

Electrical design and install

6.2

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Accommodation Requirement: Provide accommodation for telecommunications cabling infrastructure in conformance with AS/NZS 3084 including the detailed requirements of Appendix ZA, ZB and ZC. Include the following as documented: - Building distributor. - Backbone cabling. - Floor distributors. - Consolidation points. - Horizontal cabling. - Telecommunications outlets. - Fly leads. System performance Application class to AS/NZS 3080 clause 6.3: E. Balanced system to AS/NZS 3080 clause 7 (data): Category 6. Balanced system to AS/NZS 3080 clause 7 (voice): Category 6. Conformance: Certify the design and installation for conformance with AS/NZS 3080 in conformance with the detailed requirements of clause 4. System warranty: Warrant the specified communications cabling performance for a minimum of 15 years. 6.3 DISTRIBUTORS

Equipment racks Type: 19 inch rack. Free standing racks: Provide adjustable feet. Cross connect patch panels Terminations: Terminate directly to the modular connector. Patch cords: Terminate cord ends with appropriate registered jacks. Optical fibre termination panels Break out trays: Provide fibre optic cable break out trays at each group of fibre optic cable terminations. Loom cables: Neatly loom cables and lay stripped cables into the break out tray. Secure cables: Make sure that cables are secured by the sheath and that there is no stress on the fibre optic cores. 6.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS

General Outlets: Provide RJ45 8 way modular jacks except where documented otherwise. Pinouts: The pinouts vary with the application. Determine required pinouts before making cable terminations. 6.5 FLY LEADS

General Quantity: Provide fly leads to 50% of the outlets installed. 6.6 PATCH CORDS General: Provide terminated patch cords for 100% of the total incoming and outgoing ports used. 6.7 CABLES

Installation Crossover: Install cables neatly and without crossovers between cables. Loom size: Loom cables into groups not exceeding 50 cables, and hold looms in place using re-usable cable ties at least 20 mm wide. Do not exert compressive force on the cables when installing cable straps.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 185 September 2011

Electrical

Electrical design and install

Cable separation Low voltage cables: Separate telecommunications cables not enclosed in conduits or ducts from low voltage services by at least 150 mm. Electromagnetic interference (EMI): Provide clearance to minimise the effect of EMI where communications cables are installed parallel and adjacent to power cables carrying loads in excess of 200 A. 6.8 EARTHING SYSTEM

Communication earth system Communication earth system (CES): Provide a communications earth terminal (CET) adjacent to each electrical switchboard. Connect the CET to the local protective earth (PE) system at the switchboard. 6.9 COMPLETION

Cable management Record book: Provide a record book at each cross connect. Records in pencil: Complete the records in pencil for each termination and jumper, providing origin and destination and type of service. Location: Secure log books in each distribution frame records holder. Identification and labelling, and record documentation: To AS/NZS 3085.1. 7 7.1 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide a complete operational analogue and digital television distribution system, tested and commissioned in accordance with AS/NZS 1367. 7.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Performance General: To AS/NZS 1367. Signal sources Free-to-air bands: Provide a system suitable for the reception of all local Free-to-air services. Cable: Arrange with the cable network operator for the connection to their cable network. Conform with the cable network operators' requirements. Local signal source: Provide video input sockets at the premises cabling head-end for the distribution of three in-house video channels on the free-to-air network. 8 8.1 EMERGENCY EVACUATION LIGHTING RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide a complete operational monitored, emergency evacuation lighting system, tested and commissioned in conformance with AS/NZS 2293 and as documented. 8.2 SINGLE-POINT SYSTEM LUMINAIRES Visual indicator lights: Provide a red indicator, readily visible when the luminaire is in its operating location, which indicates that the battery is being charged. Inverter system: Provide protection of the inverter system against damage in the event of failure, removal or replacement of the lamp, while in normal operation. Local test switches: Provide a momentary action test switch, accessible from below the ceiling, on each luminaire to temporarily disconnect the mains supply and connect the battery to the lamp. Common test switches: Provide a common test switch on the distribution board which disconnects main supply to the luminaries and tests for discharge performance, after testing, this switch must automatically revert to normal operating mode. Monitored system

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

186

September 2011

Electrical

Electrical design and install

Data connection: Provide internal monitoring facilities and provision for the connection of data cabling to a central monitoring computer where required for this project. Proprietary systems: Use only proprietary systems with full compatibility between the monitoring system, operating software, and the luminaires selected.Batteries Type: Lead-acid or nickel-cadmium batteries capable of operating each lamp at its rated output continuously at least 2 hours during final commissioning, pre-practical completion tests and 1.5 hours during subsequent tests. Battery life: At least 3 years when operating under normal conditions at an ambient temperature of 25C and subjected to charging and discharging at 6 monthly intervals. Marking: Indelibly mark each battery with its date of manufacture. Power supply to single-point systems General: Provide an unswitched active supply to each luminaire and exit sign, originating from the test switch control panel. Data monitoring for single-point systems General: Provide a data cable system from each single-point luminaire connected to the monitoring computer. 9 9.1 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARMS RESPONSIBILITIES

General General: Provide a fully operational fire detection and alarm system, tested and commissioned in conformance with the AS 1670 series and AS 7240. 9.2 AUTHORISED PRODUCTS

General Equipment: Provide equipment listed in the ActivFire Register of Fire Protection Equipment. 9.3 FIRE ALARM MONITORING

General Standard: To AS 7240.21. Connection: Connect the installation to the fire alarm monitoring base station. Connect using telecommunications fixed wire carrier lines. 9.4 INSTALLATION WIRING

General Conductor size: 1.5 mm2 TPI 230 V rated, with red and white insulation. Sheathing: Red. 9.5 CONTROL AND INDICATING EQUIPMENT

General General: To AS 7240.2. Air-handling fire mode control panels: To AS 4428.7. Alarm investigation facility (AIF): To AS 4428.10. Alarm signalling equipment: To AS 4428.6. Wire-free alarm zone circuits: To AS 4428.9. Fire indicator panels General: Provide metal cubicle-type enclosures. Isolation General: Provide isolating facilities on fire indicator panels to enable tests to be carried out without the transmission of alarm signals to the fire brigade. 9.6 DETECTORS

Standards Duct sampling units (DSUs): To AS 1603.13.


NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 187 September 2011

Electrical

Electrical design and install

Heat detectors: To AS 7240.5. Integral heat detector/alarm units: To AS 1603.3. Point type smoke detectors: To AS 1603.2. Multi-point aspirated smoke detectors: To AS 1603.8. Optical beam smoke detectors: To AS 1603.7. Integral smoke detector/alarm units: To AS 3786. Self-indicating detectors General: Provide a light emitting diode mounted in a clearly visible position, which illuminates whenever detector operation causes an alarm condition to register on the fire indicator panel. Provide self-indicating devices which, if faulty, will not render the detector inoperative under fire conditions. Mounting positions of light emitting diodes: Conform to the following: - Visible detectors: On the outside of the detector or its base. - Detectors concealed above ceilings: On the underside of the ceiling immediately below the detector. - Detectors in other concealed spaces: On a visible panel close to the entry to the concealed space housing the detector. Installation General: Install detectors so they can be easily inspected and tested in situ, and readily withdrawn from service. Integral smoke detector/alarm units: To AS 1670.6. 9.7 MANUAL CALL POINTS

General Standard: To AS 1603.5 and AS 7240.11. 9.8 EXTERNAL ALARM INDICATION

Standards Bell: To AS 4428.1. Strobe lights: To AS 1603.11. 9.9 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS Standard: To AS 4178. Control facilities General: Provide ancillary control device circuits and connections for automatically controlling and releasing magnetic door holders to operate the relevant doors under fire alarm conditions. 9.10 FIRE FAN CONTROL AND INDICATION PANELS Fire fan control and indication panels General: Provide fire detection and alarm signals for the fire fan control panel (FFCP). 10 EMERGENCY WARNING AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM

10.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General: Provide a complete operational emergency warning and intercommunication system, tested and commissioned in conformance with AS 1670.4. Authorised products General: Provide equipment listed in the ActivFire Register of Fire Protection Equipment. 10.2 SOUND SYSTEM Loudspeakers Mounting: Securely fix to building elements. Flush mounting: Flush mount in suspended ceilings and lift cars, and if practicable elsewhere; otherwise surface mount in an enclosure. Wall mounting height: 150 mm below finished ceiling level.

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

188

September 2011

Electrical

Electrical design and install

10.3 INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM Evacuation zones Zones: Provide separate zones for each fire compartment, or a separate zone for each single storey. Warden intercommunication points Connection: Provide separate circuits for each WIP handset. Conferencing: Provide switching facilities which permit the initiation of conference calls, between up to 5 warden intercommunication points, from any emergency control panel. Lift cars: Provide a terminal block outside the lift motor room. Cable from the terminal block to central control equipment. Provide a WIP handset in each fire lift car. Marking: Permanently mark with unique circuit or serial numbers, concealed. 11 ELECTRONIC SECURITY AND ACCESS CONTROL

11.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General: Provide a complete operational access control system, tested and commissioned in conformance with AS/NZS 2053 and AS/NZS 2201.1, AS 2201.3 and AS/NZS 2201.5, as applicable. Activation General: Provide keypads, card readers or other activation devices for access control and intruder alarm and locate next to entry points. External: Provide weatherproof (IP56) hoods or housings for external units. Default mounting height: 1100 mm from floor level. 11.2 ACCESS CONTROL Access control processors or panels Capacity: Provide separate entry/exit control modules for each designated door. Users: Program the system to match the number of authorised users with unique access codes. Time zones: At least 4 per day, with provision for weekends and public holidays. Door control devices General: Provide electric strikes, electric locks, drop bolts, or similar devices to suit door construction and hardware. Fail-safe: Connect door control devices in a fail-safe mode to permit egress in the event of power failure. Authorised products: Provide equipment listed in the ActivFire Register of Fire Protection Equipment. Glass doors: Provide tumbler, drop bolts or magnetic holders. Double leaf doors (solid frame): Provide an electric strike or lock on the fixed leaf, connected to the door frame by concealed flexible wiring. Vehicle control Vehicle access control: Provide a vehicle access control system combining connection to vehicular doors and boom gates, and interconnection to the main access control system. Exit Loop detection: Provide a buried loop detection system adjacent to the exit point to activate boom gates or vehicular doors on approach by a vehicle. Connect so that doors or gates close after a preset time. Interlock: Provide a photo electric beam safety interlock. Interlock function: To prevent door or gate from closing until the vehicle has cleared the exit point. Push-buttons and readers: Where practicable, provide direct wall mounting for push-buttons or readers; otherwise provide a mounting bollard and extension arm. Default mounting height: 1000 mm from floor level. Reed switches: Provide heavy duty reed switches on both sides of vehicle doors, which generate a door closed indication at the control panel. Intercom Base station: Provide an intercom base station at each external entry point, interconnected with the individual local stations. Include speakers and microphones.
NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification 189 September 2011

Electrical

Electrical design and install

Construction: Wall mounted flush stainless steel panel. Weatherproofing: IP56. Dial: Digital push-button type. Schedule: Provide a weatherproof (IP56) schedule holder and card identifying individual local stations. Locate next to the base station intercom panel. Local station: Provide wall mounted intercom local stations, interconnected with the base stations and external entry points. Internal station type: Surface mounted, removable handset type. Operation: Provide an audible tone device to indicate that the individual station is being called, and a press-to-talk switch so that the local station can communicate with the base station only when the switch is held down. Door control: Provide integral momentary action door release switches to operate the door release or opening mechanisms at each external entry point. Interconnection to other services General: Provide functions and equipment to allow the interconnection to other systems as required. Provide and connect wiring to the designated services. 12 SELECTIONS

12.1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Electrical systems schedule As per the electrical engineers specification and drawings 12.2 NORMAL SUPPLY Normal supply schedule As per the electrical engineers specification and drawings 12.3 METERING Metering schedule As per the electrical engineers specification and drawings 12.4 POWER DISTRIBUTION Consumers mains design schedule As per the electrical engineers specification and drawings 12.5 SWITCHBOARDS Main switchboard design schedule As per the electrical engineers specification and drawings Distribution switchboards design schedule As per the electrical engineers specification and drawings 12.6 ACCESSORIES Accessories schedule As per the electrical engineers specification and drawings 12.7 LIGHTING Lighting types and illumination levels schedule As per the schedule of lighting

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

190

September 2011

Electrical

Electrical design and install

Lighting control schedule As per the electrical engineers specification, drawings and architectural electrical plans 12.8 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING Building distributor design schedule As per the electrical engineers specification and drawings Floor distributors design schedule As per the electrical engineers specification and drawings Telecommunications outlets schedule As per the electrical engineers specification, drawings and architectural electrical plans 12.9 EMERGENCY EVACUATION LIGHTING Lighting types schedule As per the electrical engineers specification, drawings and architectural electrical plans

NATSPEC 0921 Melrose specification

191

September 2011

S-ar putea să vă placă și